Instruction Book M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
Intertie ProtectionM-3520
PROTECTION
Unit shown with optional HMI and Target modules
• Integrated Protection System for DR/DG Intertie, Providing:Loss of parallel utility operation protectionsAbnormal power flow protectionsComprehensive suite of phase and ground fault backed protectionsAbnormal operating protectionsReconnect and Sync Check functions
• Microprocessor-based Intertie Protection Relay integrates protection,metering, monitoring and waveform capture
• Provides 18 base protective relay functions and 3 optional protectivefunctions
• Local and remote serial communications capabilities, plus IRIG-Binterface
Integrated Protection System®
–2–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
Standard Functions• Sync check with Phase, ΔV and ΔF with deadline/deadbus options (25)
• Phase undervoltage (27) protection
• Neutral over/undervoltage (59G/27G) protection
• Sensitive dual-setpoint, reverse power detection (32)
• Sensitive negative-sequence overcurrent protection and alarm (46)
• Negative sequence voltage (47)
• Instantaneous overcurrent (50) protection
• Instantaneous neutral overcurrent (50G) protection
• Three-phase inverse time overcurrent (51V) with voltage control/voltage restraint
• Neutral inverse time overcurrent (51G) protection
• Phase overvoltage (59) protection
• Peak overvoltage (59I) protection
• VT fuse-loss detection and blocking (60FL)
• Directional inverse and definite time phase overcurrent (67)
• Directional inverse and definite time neutral overcurrent (67N)
• Reconnect enable (79)
• Over/Underfrequency (81 O/U)
Optional Functions• Dual–zone phase distance protection for phase fault backup (21)
• Out of Step (78)
• Rate of change of frequency (81R)
Standard Features• Eight programmable outputs and six programmable inputs
• Oscillograph recording
• 32-target storage
• Metering of all measured parameters
• Three communications ports (two RS-232, one RS-485)
• Standard 19" rack-mount design
• Removable printed circuit board and power supply
• Both 50 and 60 Hz models available
• Both 1 and 5 Amp rated CT inputs available
• M-3822 IPScom® Communications Software
• IRIG-B time synchronization
Optional Features• Redundant power supply
• M-3915 Target Module
• M-3931 Human-Machine Interface Module
• M-3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software
• 4-Wire RS-485 Connection
–3–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
STANDARD FUNCTIONSDevice SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†
Sync CheckSync CheckSync CheckSync CheckSync Check
Phase Angle Window 0° to 90° 1° 1°
Upper Voltage Limit 60 to 140 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Lower Voltage Limit 40 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Delta Voltage Limit 1.0 to 50.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V
Delta Frequency Limit 0.001 to 0.500 Hz 0.001 Hz 0.0007 Hz or 5%
Sync Check Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Dead Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1 V 0.5 V
Dead Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Sync Check may be operated as a stand-alone function or supervised by 79 (reconnect). Various combi-nations of input supervised hot/dead closing schemes may be selected.
UndervoltageUndervoltageUndervoltageUndervoltageUndervoltage
Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%0.8 V or 0.75%*
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
* When line-ground to line-line is selected.
Neutral UndervoltageNeutral UndervoltageNeutral UndervoltageNeutral UndervoltageNeutral Undervoltage
Magnitude 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Reverse/Forward PowerReverse/Forward PowerReverse/Forward PowerReverse/Forward PowerReverse/Forward Power
Pickup #1, #2 -3.000 to +3.000 PU 0.001 PU 0.002 PU or 2%
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +16 Cycles or 1%
The per-unit pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal CT secondary current settings.Single phase detection may be selected for line-to-ground connected VTs. This function can be selected aseither overpower or underpower in the forward direction (positive setting) or reverse direction (negative setting).
Negative Sequence OvercurrentNegative Sequence OvercurrentNegative Sequence OvercurrentNegative Sequence OvercurrentNegative Sequence Overcurrent
Definite TimePickup 0.10 to 20.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.02 to 4.00 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to + 3 Cycles or 3%
Inverse TimePickup 0.50 to 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.10 to 1.00 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Characteristic Curves Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
Negative Sequence OvervoltageNegative Sequence OvervoltageNegative Sequence OvervoltageNegative Sequence OvervoltageNegative Sequence Overvoltage
Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
27
46
47
†Select the greater of these accuracy values. Values in parentheses apply to 1 Amp CT secondary rating.
25
27G
32
–4–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
STANDARD FUNCTIONS (cont.)Device SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†
Instantaneous Phase OvercurrentInstantaneous Phase OvercurrentInstantaneous Phase OvercurrentInstantaneous Phase OvercurrentInstantaneous Phase Overcurrent
Pickup 1.0 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.2 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Time Delay 2 Cycles — 2 Cycles
Instantaneous Neutral OvercurrentInstantaneous Neutral OvercurrentInstantaneous Neutral OvercurrentInstantaneous Neutral OvercurrentInstantaneous Neutral Overcurrent
Pickup 0.5 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.1 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Time Delay 2 Cycles — 2 Cycles
The 50G can be supervised by the ground directional element (if 67N option is selected).
Inverse Time Neutral OvercurrentInverse Time Neutral OvercurrentInverse Time Neutral OvercurrentInverse Time Neutral OvercurrentInverse Time Neutral Overcurrent
Pickup 0.25 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.05 to 2.40 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
The 51G can be supervised by the ground directional element.
Inverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage RestraintInverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage RestraintInverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage RestraintInverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage RestraintInverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint
Pickup 0.50 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.10 to 2.40 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
Voltage Control (VC) 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 5%or
Voltage Restraint (VR) Linear Restraint — —
OvervoltageOvervoltageOvervoltageOvervoltageOvervoltage
Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%0.8 V or 0.75%*
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
* When line-ground to line-line is selected.
Neutral OvervoltageNeutral OvervoltageNeutral OvervoltageNeutral OvervoltageNeutral Overvoltage
Pickup 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Peak OvervoltagePeak OvervoltagePeak OvervoltagePeak OvervoltagePeak Overvoltage
Magnitude 1.05 to 1.50 PU 0.01 PU 0.03 PU*
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Instantaneous voltage magnitude response; intended for ferroresonance protection.
*For fundamental (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal only. For distorted input signals, the accuracy degrades as theorder of the harmonic signal increases. The accuracy applies to voltages below 180 V.
†Select the greater of these accuracy values. Values in parentheses apply to 1 Amp CT secondary rating.
50
50G
51G
59
51V
59G
59I
–5–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
STANDARD FUNCTIONS (cont.)Device SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†
VT Fuse–Loss DetectionVT Fuse–Loss DetectionVT Fuse–Loss DetectionVT Fuse–Loss DetectionVT Fuse–Loss Detection
A VT fuse loss condition is detected by using the positive and negative sequence componentsof the voltages and currents. VT fuse loss output can be initiated from internally generated logicor from input contacts.
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Phase Directional OvercurrentPhase Directional OvercurrentPhase Directional OvercurrentPhase Directional OvercurrentPhase Directional Overcurrent
Definite Time*Pickup 1.0 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.2 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Inverse TimePickup 0.50 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.10 to 2.40 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial Setting 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
Phase Directional ElementMaximum Sensitivity(Torque) Angle (MSA) 0° to 359° 1°
*High speed operation results when delay programmed for one cycle; response time = less than 1–1/2cycles.
Directional sensing for 67DT or 67IT may be disabled. Sensitivity at MSA is 0.5 VA, uses PositiveSequence Voltage and current for polarization, prefault memory 8 cycles.
Residual Directional Overcurrent
Definite Time*Pickup 0.5 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.1 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Inverse Time*Pickup 0.25 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.05 to 2.40 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)
Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%0.05 to 1.10 (IEC Curves) 0.01
Ground Directional ElementMax. Sensitivity Angle (MSA) 0 to 359° 1°
Polarization** 1 to 5 1
*Directional control for 67NDT or 67NIT may be disabled.
** Polarization can be zero sequence, negative sequence, current (polarized) or dual polarized. Polariza-tions 1, 3 and 5 shall not be used with L-L and L-G to L-L VT selection. When using polarizations 4 or 5,MSA is not applicable and should be set to zero.
†Select the greater of these accuracy values. Values in parentheses apply to 1 Amp CT secondary rating.
60FL
67N
67
–6–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
STANDARD FUNCTIONS (cont.)Device SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†
Reconnect Enable Time DelayReconnect Enable Time DelayReconnect Enable Time DelayReconnect Enable Time DelayReconnect Enable Time Delay
Reconnect Delay 2 to 65500 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Reconnect timer starts when all outputs designated as trip outputs dropout.
FrequencyFrequencyFrequencyFrequencyFrequency
Pickup #1, #2, #3, #4 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Time Delay #1,#2, #3, #4 2 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle –2 to +3 Cycles or 1%
The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a rangeof 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz.
*This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models.
†Select the greater of these accuracy values. Values in parentheses apply to 1 Amp CT secondary rating.
81
79
–7–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONSDevice SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†
Phase Distance (dual–zone mho characteristic)Phase Distance (dual–zone mho characteristic)Phase Distance (dual–zone mho characteristic)Phase Distance (dual–zone mho characteristic)Phase Distance (dual–zone mho characteristic)
Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)
Offset #1, #2 –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)
Impedance Angle #1, #2 0° to 90° 1° 1°
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Out of Step (mho characteristic)Out of Step (mho characteristic)Out of Step (mho characteristic)Out of Step (mho characteristic)Out of Step (mho characteristic)
Circle Diameter 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)
Offset –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)
Impedance Angle 0° to 90° 1° 1°
Blinder 0.1 to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 250.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Trip on mho Exit Enable/Disable
Pole Slip Counter 1 to 20 1
Pole Slip Reset 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Rate of Change of FrequencyRate of Change of FrequencyRate of Change of FrequencyRate of Change of FrequencyRate of Change of Frequency
Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec 0.01 Hz/Sec 0.05 Hz/Sec or 5%
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +20 Cycles
Negative SequenceVoltage Inhibit 0 to 99% 1% 0.5%
Nominal SettingsNominal SettingsNominal SettingsNominal SettingsNominal Settings
Nominal Voltage 60 to 140 V 1 V —
Nominal Current 0.5 to 6.00 A 0.01 A —
VT Configuration Line-LineLine-Ground
Line-Ground to Line-Line*
Seal-In Delay 2 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
*When line-ground to line-line is selected, the relay internally calculates the line-line voltage from theline-ground voltages for all voltage-sensitive functions. This line-ground to line-line selection should onlybe used to a VT nominal secondary voltage of 69 V (not 120 V).
78
†Select the greater of these accuracy values. Values in parentheses apply to 1 Amp CT secondary rating.
21
81R
–8–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
Configuration OptionsThe M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay can be purchased with standard protective functions or as a basesystem with reduced functionality. The user can also select optional protective functions as required toexpand the functionality of the Standard Protection System or Base System to satisfy specific applicationneeds. The optional Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, Target Module, and redundant power supplyare available for either configuration.
MeteringThe relay provides metering of voltages (phase, neutral and sequence quantities), currents (phase, neutraland sequence quantities), real power, reactive power, power factor and impedance measurements.
Metering Accuracies are:
Voltage: ± 0.5 V or ± 0.5%, whichever is greater0.8 V or 0.75%, whichever is greater (when line-ground to line-line is selected)
Current: 5 A rating, ± 0.1 A or ± 3%, whichever is greater1 A rating, ± 0.02 A or ± 3%, whichever is greater
Power ± 0.01 PU or ± 2%, whichever is greater(real and reactive)
Frequency: ± 0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)
Oscillographic RecorderThe oscillograph recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, storing up to170 cycles of data. The total record length may be user-configured for 1, 2, 3 or 4 partitions. The samplingrate is 16 times the power system nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The recorder is triggered either via thedesignated status inputs, trip outputs, or via serial communications. When untriggered, the recordercontinuously stores waveform data, keeping the most recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorderstores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period.
Target StorageA total of 32 targets can be stored. Recorded information includes the type of function(s) operated, thefunctions picked up, input/output contact status, timer status, and phase and neutral currents at the time of trip.
CalculationsCurrent and Voltage Values: Uses discrete Fourier transform algorithm on sampled (16 times per cycle)voltage and current signals to extract fundamental frequency phasors for calculations.
Power Input OptionsNominal 110/120/230/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 V dc. Operates properly from 85 V acto 265 V ac and from 80 V dc to 288 V dc; Withstands 300 V ac or 300 V dc for 1 second; Burden 20 VA at120 V ac/125 V dc.
Nominal 24/48 V dc. Operates properly from 18 V dc to 56 V dc; Withstands 65 V dc for 1 second; Burden25 VA at 24 V dc and 30 VA at 48 V dc.
Unit is available with an optional redundant power supply.
Sensing InputsFive Voltage Inputs: Rated nominal voltage of 60 V ac to 140 V ac, 60 Hz (50 Hz optional). Withstands 240 Vcontinuous voltage and 360 V for 10 seconds. Source voltages may be line-to-ground or line-to-line connected.Phase sequence ABC/ACB is selectable. Voltage transformer burden less than 0.2 VA at 120 V ac.
Four Current Inputs: Rated current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A (optional), 60 Hz (50 Hz optional). Withstands 2 I
Rcontinuous current and 100 I
R for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A (5 A
option), or 0.3 VA at 1 A (1 A option).
–9–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
Control/Status InputsThe control/status inputs, INPUT1 through INPUT6, can be programmed to block any of the relay functions,trigger the oscillographic recorder or operate one or more outputs. The control/status inputs are designed tobe connected to dry contacts and are internally wetted with a 24 V dc power supply. To provide breakerstatus LED indication on the front panel, the INPUT1 control/status input contact should be connected to the52b breaker status contact.
Output ContactsThe eight programmable output contacts (six form ‘a’ and two form ‘c’), the power supply alarm outputcontact (form ‘b’), and the self-test alarm output contact (form ‘c’) are all rated as per ANSI/IEEEC37.90-1989 for tripping: make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, carry 8 A, break 6 A @ 120 V ac, break 0.1 A @ 125V dc, inductive break 0.1 A.
Any of the relay functions can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the eightprogrammable output contacts.
Target/Status Indicators and ControlsThe RELAY OK LED reveals proper cycling of the microcomputer. The BRKR CLOSED LED illuminates whenthe breaker is closed (when the 52b contact is open). The OSC TRIG LED indicates that oscillographic data hasbeen recorded in the unit's memory. The corresponding TARGETS LED will illuminate when any of the relayfunctions trip. Pressing and releasing the TARGET RESET pushbutton resets the TARGET LED if theconditions causing the operation have been removed. Pressing and holding the TARGET RESET pushbuttonwill allow elements or funcitons in pickup to be displayed. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs remain illuminated as longas power is applied to the unit and the power supply is operating properly. The TIME SYNC LED will illuminatewhen a valid IRIG-B signal is applied, and time synchronization has been established.
CommunicationCommunications ports include rear panel RS-232 and RS-485 ports, a front panel RS-232 port, and an IRIG-Bport. The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented, asynchronous communication, andprovides the following functions when used with the Microsoft® Windows™ compatible M-3822 IPScom®
Communications Software package. MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols are supported using:
• Setpoint interrogation and modification
• Time-stamped trip target information for the 32 most recent events
• Real time metering of all quantities measured
• Downloading of recorded oscillographic data (not available with MODBUS protocol)
IRIG-BThe relay can accept either modulated or demodulated IRIG-B time clock synchronization signal. The IRIG-Btime synchronization information is used to correct the hour, minutes, seconds and milliseconds information.
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module (optional)Local access to the relay is provided through an optional M-3931 HMI Module, allowing for easy to use,menu-driven access to all functions via a 6-button keyboard and a 2-line by 24 character alphanumericdisplay. Features of the HMI Module include the following:
• User-definable access codes providing three levels of security
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints
• Time-stamped trip target information for the 32 most recent events
• Real-time metering of all quantities measured
–10–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
Target Module (optional)An optional M-3915 Target Module provides 24 target and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate TARGET LEDsilluminate when the corresponding function trips. The targets can be reset with the TARGET RESETpushbutton if the trip conditions have been removed. The OUTPUT LEDs indicate the status of theprogrammable output contacts. The module connects to the M-3520 Intertie Protection unit.
Type Tests and StandardsM-3520 Intertie Protection Relay complies with the following tests and standards:
Voltage Withstand
Dielectric WithstandIEC 255-5 3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth
3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to IRIG-B circuit to earth1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to RS-485 circuit (2-wire) to earth1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to RS-485 circuit (2-wire) to each independent circuit
Impulse VoltageIEC 255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit1.2 X 50 μs, 500 Ohms impedance, three surges at 5 second intervals
Insulation ResistanceIEC 255-5 > 40 MegaOhms
Electrical Environment
Electrostatic Discharge TestIEC 1000-4-2 Class 4 (8 kV) – point contact discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance TestsIEC 1000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)
Surge Withstand CapabilityANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk Oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earthC37.90.1 2,500 V pk-pk Oscillatory applied between each independent circuit1989 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit
Radiated SusceptibilityANSI/IEEE 25–1000 MHz @ 35 V/mC37.90.21987
–11–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
Output ContactsANSI/IEEE Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds off for 15 seconds for 2,000 operationsC37.90.0
Atmospheric Environment
TemperatureIEC 68-2-1 Cold, –20° C for 96 hoursIEC 6-2-2 Dry Heat, +70° C for 96 hoursIEC 68-2-3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 93% RH, for 96 hours
Mechanical Environment
VibrationIEC 255-21-1 Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g
Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g
ComplianceUL Listed per 508 – Industrial Control Equipment.
CSA Certified per C22.2 No. 14-95-Industrial Control Equipment.
External ConnectionsExternal connection points and connection information are illustrated in Figures 1, 2, and 3, on the followingpages.
PhysicalSize: 19.00" wide x 5.21" high x 10.20" deep (48.3 cm x 13.2 cm x 25.9 cm)
Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, 3-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to ANSI/EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494, Part 5 specifications. Vertical mounting is also available.
Contact Beckwith Electric for optional GE L-2/Westinghouse FT-41 retrofit panel vertical mounting details.
Approximate Weight: 17 lbs (7.7 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 25 lbs (11.3 kg)
Recommended Storage Parameters
Temperature: 5° C to 40° C
Humidity: Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° Clinearly to 50% relative humidity at 40° C.
Environment: Storage area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable materials, dew,percolating water, rain and solar radiation.
See M-3520 Instruction Book, Appendix E, Layup and Storage for additional information.
Patent & WarrantyThe M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay is covered by U.S. Patents 5,592,393 and 5,224,011.
The M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay is covered by a five year warranty from date of shipment.
Specification subject to change without notice.
–12–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
!
"
#!
!$
%
%
%
%
&!
&!
'
#
! % !
&(!
&#!
!
)*+
!
!
!#
#
$
!
&!
&!
&,)
+
,
,
,%
-
!
-
( !'
'
.
'
) +
,(
/
%
'
'
(
'
'
(
#&#!
Figure 1
External C
onnections
N
OT
ES
:
1.O
utput contacts #1 through #4 contain special circuitry for high-speed operation, and close 4 ms faster than outputs #5 through #8. O
utputs #1through #6 are form
"a" contacts (normally open), and O
utputs #7 and #8 are form "c" contacts (center tapped "a" and "b" contacts).
2.T
o comply w
ith UL and C
SA
listing requirements, term
inal block connections must be m
ade with #12 A
WG
solid or stranded copper wire inserted in
an AM
P #324915 (or equivalent) connector. W
ire insulation must be rated at 60°C
minim
um. T
erminal block connections 1 through 34 m
ust betightened to 12 inch-pounds torque. T
erminal block connections 35 through 63 m
ust be tightened to 8 inch-pounds torque.
3.O
NLY
dry contacts must be connected to inputs (term
inals 5 through 10 with 11 com
mon) because these contact inputs are internally w
etted.A
pp
lication
of extern
al voltag
e on
these in
pu
ts may resu
lt in d
amag
e to th
e un
it.
4.A
ll relays are shown in the de-energized state, and w
ithout power applied to the relay.
5.T
he power supply relay (P
/S) is energized w
hen the power supply is functioning properly.
6.T
he self-test relay is energized when the relay has perform
ed all self-tests successfully.
–13–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
This function is available as astandard protective function.
This function is available as aoptional protective function.
Note: M-3520 may be purchased as abase protection system with 59, 27,81O/U,79 and 60FL functions only.
CT
M-3520
52
CT
UtilitySystem
5252
* VT
67 51V 32 217860FL
4650
81O/U
5959I 27 47
50G
51G
59G
27G
81R
79
25
67N
Targets(Optional)
Integral HMI(Optional)
Metering
Sequence OfEvents
Waveform Capture
IRIG-B
Front RS232Communication
Multiple SettingGroups
Programmable I/O
Self Diagnostics
Dual Power Supply(Optional)
Rear RS-232/485Communication
ProgrammableLogic
VT
VT
M-3520Typical
Connection Diagram
NOTE: *Voltage Transformer (VT) connection may be either broken delta or single, line to ground VTdepending on application (for ungrounded system).
Figure 2 Typical One-Line Connection Diagram
*
–14–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
A
B
C
52-2
52-1
A
B
C
35 3736 38
M-3520
A
B
C
M-3520 Typical Three-lineConnection Diagram
44 43
Power
F
R
A
B
C
A
B
C
42 41
M-3520
4142
M-3520
A B C
51 50
49 48
47 46
M-3520
53 52M-3520
40 39
VAB VBC VCA V2
36 38 4035 37 39
M-3520
44 43
V2VA VB VC
9 1110 8 16 1361 63
M-3520
34 32
15 1260 62 33 31
IN 152b
IN 2 IN 3 INRTN
52bOtherInputs
PS2 PS1
+
Self-Test
P/S OUT1
Self-TestAlarmFailure
PowerOKStatusAlarm
52-1Trip
52a
Alarm
A
B
C
A
BC
Alternate Phase VTConnection
IA
IB
IC
IG
Alternate VTConnection
Figure 3 Typical Three–Line Connection Diagram
–15–
M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay
17.31 [43.97]ACTUAL
5.21 [13.23]ACTUAL
5.28 [13.41]
17.50 [44.45]
10.20 [25.91]
19.00[48.26]
17.78 [45.16]
18.58 [47.19]
2.35 [5.96]
1.35 [3.42]
Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY ISNOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT
Rear View
0.40 [1.02] x 0.27 [0.68] SLOT (4x)
Figure 4 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.6190 – 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773–3724 U.S.A.
Phone (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121E-MAIL [email protected] PAGE www.beckwithelectric.com© 1998 Beckwith Electric
Printed in U.S.A.800-3520-SP-14 10-07
Optional Vertical Mount Chassis
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets arein centimeters.
17.78[45.16]
18.58[47.19]
2.25[5.72] 1.71
[4.34]
19.00[48.26] 17.31
[43.97]Actual
5.59[14.20]
5.65[13.41]
17.50[44.45]
ACTUAL
0.40 [1.02] x0.27 [0.68]SLOT (4x)
Rear View
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY ISNOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT
Figure 5 Vertical Mounting Dimensions
WARNINGDANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or seriousinjury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internalvoltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-nal terminals.
DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE
– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and youmust never touch it.
PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONSThe following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application, test or repair of thisequipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Qualifiedpersonnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for thecustomer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation
manual for important information before proceeding.
Always Ground the Equipment
To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servic-ing equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate groundsecurely by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.
Do NOT operate in an explosive environmentDo not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do sowould risk a possible fire or explosion.
Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power isapplied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerousvoltages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnectpower and discharge circuits before working on the unit.
Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance proceduresThe equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury ordeath. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure thatall personnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicingalone.
Do not modify equipmentDo not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a BeckwithElectric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to followreplacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.
PRODUCT CAUTIONSBefore attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiarwith the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If acomponent is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safetyfeatures are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in theParts List of the Instruction Book.
Avoid static chargeThis unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Careshould be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.
Use caution when measuring resistancesAny attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwisenoted in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.
i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents ................................................................... 1–1
1.2 M-3520 Intertie Protection ................................................................... 1–2
1.3 Accessories ........................................................................................ 1–4
Chapter 2 Application
2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................... 2–1
2.2 System Diagrams ................................................................................ 2–2
2.3 Configuration ....................................................................................... 2–4Functions ............................................................................................ 2–4Special Input/Output Considerations ................................................... 2–4System Setup ..................................................................................... 2–5
2.4 Setpoints and Time Settings ............................................................... 2–721 Phase Distance .............................................................................. 2–725 Sync Check ...................................................................................2–1127 Undervoltage, 3-Phase...................................................................2–1632 Directional Power ...........................................................................2–1746 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ....................................................2–2047 Negative Sequence Overvoltage....................................................2–2250 Instantaneous Overcurrent, 3-Phase .............................................2–2350G Instantaneous Overcurrent, Neutral .............................................2–2451V Inverse Time Overcurrent withVoltage Control or Voltage Restraint ................................................ 2–2551G Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ............................................ 2–2859I Peak Overvoltage ....................................................................... 2–2959 Overvoltage, 3-Phase .................................................................. 2–3059G/27G Overvoltage/Undervoltage,Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ..................................................... 2–3160FL Fuse Loss ................................................................................ 2–3567 Phase Directional Overcurrent .................................................... 2–3667N Residual Directional Overcurrent .............................................. 2–3978 Out of Step ................................................................................... 2–4179 Reconnect Enable Time Delay .................................................... 2–4381 Frequency .................................................................................... 2–4581R Rate of Change of Frequency ................................................... 2–47
2.5 Oscillograph Recorder ...................................................................... 2–48
2.6 Target History Recorder ......................................................................2–49
2.7 IRIG-B Time Synchronization .............................................................2–49
TABLE OF CONTENTSM-3520 Intertie Protection
Instruction Book
ii
M-3520 Instruction Book
Chapter 3 Operation (Front Panel)
3.1 Front Panel Controls ............................................................................ 3–1Alphanumeric Display .......................................................................... 3–1Arrow Buttons ...................................................................................... 3–2Exit Button .......................................................................................... 3–2Enter Button ........................................................................................ 3–2Target/Status Indicators and Control ................................................... 3–2Power Supply (PS1 and PS2) .............................................................. 3–2Relay OK LED ..................................................................................... 3–2Oscillograph (OSC TRIG) LED ............................................................ 3–2Breaker (BRKR) Closed LED ............................................................... 3–2Time Sync LED ................................................................................... 3–2Diagnostic LED (DIAG LED) ................................................................ 3–2Accessing Screens ............................................................................. 3–2Default Message Screens.................................................................... 3–3Serial Interfaces (COM1, COM2, and COM3) ...................................... 3–3Communication Specifications ............................................................ 3–3
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings .......................................................... 3–6Setup Procedure .................................................................................. 3–6Communication Data ........................................................................... 3–8Setup Unit Data ................................................................................... 3–8Setup System ..................................................................................... 3–8Configure Relay Data ........................................................................... 3–8Setpoints and Time Settings ..............................................................3–10Oscillograph Recorder Data ................................................................3–10Target History Recorder ......................................................................3–10
3.3 Checkout Status/Metering ..................................................................3–11
Chapter 4 Operation (Computer)
4.1 Installation and Setup .......................................................................... 4–1Hardware Requirements ....................................................................... 4–1Use of IPScom® and M-3520 Intertie Protection Relayusing a Modem ................................................................................... 4–2Use of IPScom and M-3520 Intertie Protection Relayusing Direct Serial Connection ........................................................... 4–2Installation ........................................................................................... 4–2Installing IPScom ................................................................................ 4–2Installing IPSutil .................................................................................. 4–2Installing the Modems ......................................................................... 4–2Setting Up the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay for Communication . 4–3Multiple Systems Setup ...................................................................... 4–4Serial Multidrop Network Setup .......................................................... 4–4
4.2 Operation ............................................................................................ 4–5Activating Communications ................................................................ 4–5Overview ............................................................................................. 4–7File Menu ............................................................................................ 4–7Comm Menu ....................................................................................... 4–7Relay Menu ......................................................................................... 4–8Window Menu ................................................................................... 4–14Help Menu......................................................................................... 4–14
iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Operation (Computer) (cont)
4.3 Cautions .............................................................................................4–15
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering ..................................................................4–16
4.5 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................4–20
4.6 IPSutil™ Communications Software ....................................................4–21M-3890 IPSutil ....................................................................................4–22Installation and Setup .........................................................................4–22Hardware Requirements ......................................................................4–22Installation ..........................................................................................4–22System Setup ....................................................................................4–22Overview.............................................................................................4–22Comm Menu .......................................................................................4–22Relay Comm .......................................................................................4–23Clock ..................................................................................................4–24Security Menu ....................................................................................4–24Miscellaneous Menu ...........................................................................4–25Help Menu ..........................................................................................4–26
Chapter 5 Installation
5.1 General Information ............................................................................. 5–1
5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions ........................................................ 5–1
5.3 External Connections........................................................................... 5–6
5.4 Commissioning Checkout .................................................................... 5–8
5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ..................................................5–10
Chapter 6 Testing
6.1 Equipment and Test Setup .................................................................. 6–2
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................................ 6–3Output Test (Relay) ............................................................................. 6–4Input Test (Status)............................................................................... 6–4Status LED Test .................................................................................. 6–5Target LED Test .................................................................................. 6–6Expanded I/O Test .............................................................................. 6–6Button Test.......................................................................................... 6–6Display Test ........................................................................................ 6–7Communications Test .......................................................................... 6–7COM1 & COM2 Test ........................................................................... 6–7COM3 Test (2Wire) .............................................................................. 6–7COM3 Test (4Wire) .............................................................................. 6–8Clock Test ........................................................................................... 6–8Flash Relay OK LED ........................................................................... 6–9Factory Use Only ................................................................................ 6–9
iv
M-3520 Instruction Book
Chapter 6 Testing
6.3 Automatic Calibration..........................................................................6–10
6.4 Input Configurations ............................................................................6–11
6.5 Functional Test Procedures ................................................................6–1221 Phase Distance (#1, #2) ................................................................6–1325 Sync Check ...................................................................................6–1527 Undervoltage, 3 Phase (#1, #2) .....................................................6–1727G Undervoltage, Neutral .................................................................6–1832 Directional Power, #1 or #2 ............................................................6–1946DT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time..........................6–2146IT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time ...........................6–2247 Negative Sequence Overvoltage....................................................6–2350 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent .................................................6–2450G Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent, Neutral .................................6–2551V Inverse Time Overcurrent, Phase................................................6–2651G Inverse Time Residual Overcurrent, Neutral ...............................6–2759 Overvoltage, 3–Phase (#1 or #2) ...................................................6–2859I Peak Overvoltage, 3–Phase .........................................................6–2959G Neutral Overvoltage ....................................................................6–3060FL V.T. Fuse Loss Detection ..........................................................6–3167DT Definite Time Directional Overcurrent .......................................6–3267IT Inverse Time Directional Overcurrent .........................................6–3367NDT Residual Definite Time Directional Overcurrent .......................6–3467NIT Residual Inverse Time Directional Overcurrent ........................6–3678 Out of Step ....................................................................................6–3879 Reconnect .....................................................................................6–3981 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, or #4) .........................................................6–4081R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2) .........................................6–41
Appendices
Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms ............................................ A–1
Appendix B: Communications ............................................................. B–1
Appendix C: Error Codes ..................................................................... C–1
Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves ....................................................... D–1
Appendix E: Layup and Storage .......................................................... E–1
v
Table of Contents
Figures Page
Chapter 1
1-1 M-3520 Front & Rear Panels .............................................................. 1–3
1-2 M-3915 Target Module ...................................................................... 1–4
1-3 M-3931 Human-Machine Interface ..................................................... 1–4
Chapter 2
2-1 One-Line Functional Diagram ............................................................. 2–2
2-2 Three-Line Connection Diagram ........................................................ 2–3
2-3 Phase Distance (21) Zones of Protection ........................................... 2–8
2-4 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Phase Faults ....... 2–8
2-5 M-3822 IPScom® for WindowsPhase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges ............................................. 2–10
2-6 Logic Diagrams ................................................................................. 2–12
2-7 Function 25/79 Logic Diagrams ........................................................ 2–13
2-8 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges.... 2–15
2-9 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges . 2–16
2-10 Directional Power Configurations ..................................................... 2–18
2-11 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsDirectional Power (32) Setpoint Ranges .......................................... 2–19
2-12 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsNegative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges ................... 2–21
2-13 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsNegative Sequence Overvoltage (47) Setpoint Ranges ................... 2–22
2-14 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsInstantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50) Setpoint Ranges ................. 2–23
2-15 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsInstantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50G) Setpoint Ranges ............ 2–24
2-16 Voltage Restraint (51V) Characteristic ............................................. 2–26
2-17 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Inverse Time Overcurrentwith Voltage Control/Voltage Restrain (51V) Setpoint Ranges ........ 2–27
2-18 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Inverse Time NeutralOvercurrent (51G) Setpoint Ranges ................................................. 2–28
2-19 M-3822 IPScom® for WindowsPeak Overvoltage (59I) Setpoint Ranges ......................................... 2–29
2-20 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsPhase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges ........................................ 2–30
vi
M-3520 Instruction Book
Figures (cont'd) Page
Chapter 2 (cont)
2-21 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsNeutral Overvoltage (59G) Setpoint Ranges .................................... 2–31
2-22 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsNeutral Undervoltage (27G) Setpoint Ranges .................................. 2–32
2-23 Ground Fault Detection Using 59G and Broken-Delta VTs .............. 2–33
2-24 Ground Fault Detection Using 27G and 59G with One VT ........... 2–34
2-25 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges .. 2–35
2-26 Phase Directional Overcurrent (67) Trip Characteristics .................. 2–36
2-27 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsPhase Directional Overcurrent (67) Setpoint Ranges ...................... 2–38
2-28 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsResidual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Setpoint Ranges ................ 2–40
2-29 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics .................................................... 2–41
2-30 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Out of Step (78) Setpoint Ranges ..... 2–42
2-31 79 Function Logic Diagram ............................................................... 2–43
2-32 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsReconnect Enable Time Delay (79) Setpoint Ranges ...................... 2–44
2-33 Typical Settings of 81 Function ......................................................... 2–45
2-34 M-3822 IPScom for Windows Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges ...... 2–46
2-35 M-3822 IPScom for WindowsRate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges ..................... 2–47
Chapter 3
3-1 M-3520 Front Panel ............................................................................ 3–4
3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow .............................................................. 3–4
3-3 Main Menu Flow ................................................................................. 3–5
3-4 Setup System Menu ........................................................................... 3–7
3-5 Communication Data & Unit Setup Menu ........................................... 3–9
Chapter 4
4-1 IPScom® Program Icon ....................................................................... 4–2
4-2 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications Line Splitter ... 4–4
4-3 IPScom Menu Selections .................................................................... 4–6
4-4 New Device Profile Dialog Box ........................................................... 4–7
4-5 Communication Dialog Box ................................................................ 4–8
4-6 Setup System Dialog Box ................................................................... 4–9
vii
Table of Contents
Figures (cont'd) Page
Chapter 4 (cont)
4-7 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–10
4-8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Setpoint Dialog Box ..................... 4–10
4-9 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box ......................................................... 4–11
4-10 Configure Dialog Box ........................................................................ 4–12
4-11 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box ............................................................... 4–13
4-12 Target Dialog Box ............................................................................. 4–14
4-13 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ........................................................... 4–14
4-14 Primary Status Dialog Box ................................................................ 4–16
4-15 Secondary Status Dialog Box ........................................................... 4–16
4-16 Phase Distance Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–17
4-17 Function Status Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–17
4-18 Phasor Diagram ................................................................................ 4–18
4-19 Sync Scope Diagram ........................................................................ 4–18
4-20 Out-of-Step Screen ........................................................................... 4–19
4-21 IPSutil™ Main Menu Flow ................................................................ 4–21
4-22 Warning Message ............................................................................. 4–22
4-23 Communications Dialog Box ............................................................. 4–22
4-24 Relay Comm Port Settings ............................................................... 4–23
4-25 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box ............................................................... 4–24
4-26 Change Communication Access Code Dialog Box .......................... 4–24
4-27 Change Level Access Code Dialog Box ........................................... 4–25
4-28 Setup Dialog Box .............................................................................. 4–25
4-29 Monitor Status Dialog Screen ........................................................... 4–26
Chapter 5
5-1 M-3520 Mounting Dimensions – Horizontal Chassis ........................ 5–2
5-2 M-3520 Mounting Dimensions – Vertical Chassis ............................ 5–3
5-3 (H2) Mounting Dimensions ................................................................. 5–4
5-4 (H3) Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet .................................. 5–5
5-5 External Connections .......................................................................... 5–6
5-6 Three-Line Connection Diagram ........................................................ 5–7
5-7 M-3520 Circuit Board ........................................................................ 5–11
viii
M-3520 Instruction Book
Figures (cont'd) Page
Chapter 6
6-1 Status LED Panel ............................................................................... 6–5
6-2 M-3915 Target Module ....................................................................... 6–6
6-3 M-3931 Man-Machine Interface Module ............................................. 6–6
6-4 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug ............................................................. 6–7
6-5 RS-485 2 Wire Testing ....................................................................... 6–8
6-6 RS-485 4 Wire Testing ....................................................................... 6–8
6-7 Voltage Calibration Configuration ..................................................... 6–10
6-8 Current Calibration Configuration ..................................................... 6–10
6-9 Voltage Inputs, Configuration V1 ...................................................... 6–11
6-10 Voltage Inputs, Configuration V2 ...................................................... 6–11
6-11 Current Inputs, Configuration C1 ...................................................... 6–11
6-12 Current Inputs, Configuration C2 ...................................................... 6–11
6-13 Current Inputs, Configuration C3 ...................................................... 6–11
Appendix A
A-1 Human-Machine Interface Module .....................................................A–3
A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form ...............................A–4
A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form ...............................................A–6
A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form .........................................................A–9
A-5 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form – As Shipped ..... A–13
A-6 Functional Configuration Record Form – As Shipped .................... A–15
A-7 Setpoint & Timing Record Form – As Shipped ...............................A–17
Appendix B
B-1 Null Modem Cable for M-3520 ............................................................B–2
B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network ...............................................................B–3
B-3 RS-485 Networks ................................................................................B–4
ix
Table of Contents
Figures (cont'd) Page
Appendix D
D-1 Definite Time Overcurrent Curve ....................................................... D–4
D-2 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ....................................................... D–5
D-3 Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ............................................... D–6
D-4 Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ...................................... D–7
D-5 IEC Curve #1 Inverse ........................................................................ D–8
D-6 IEC Curve #2 Very Inverse ................................................................ D–9
D-7 IEC Curve #3 Extremely Inverse ..................................................... D–10
D-8 IEC Curve #4 Long-Time Inverse .................................................... D–11
Tables Page
Chapter 1
1-1 M-3520 Device Functions ................................................................... 1–2
Chapter 2
2-1 Impedance Calculation ....................................................................... 2–7
2-2 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs ................................. 2–25
2-3 Typical Shunt Resistor Values .......................................................... 2–33
Chapter 4
4-1 Windows Keyboard Shortcuts .......................................................... 4–20
Chapter 5
5-1 Jumper Settings ................................................................................ 5–10
5-2 Switch Positions ................................................................................ 5–10
Chapter 6
6-1 Functions to Disable While Testing .................................................... 6–3
6-2 Output Contacts .................................................................................. 6–4
6-3 Input Contacts ..................................................................................... 6–4
x
M-3520 Instruction Book
Tables (cont.) Page
Appendix A
A-1 Relay Configuration Table ..................................................................A–2
A-2 M-3520 Configuration As Shipped ....................................................A–19
Appendix B
B-1 Communication Port Signals ..............................................................B–2
Appendix C
C-1A Error Codes ....................................................................................... C–1
C-1B Error Codes ....................................................................................... C–2
Appendix D
D-1A M-3520 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves ....... D–2
D-1B M-3520 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves ....... D–3
800-3520-IB-09MC1 10/07© Beckwith Electric Co.Printed in U.S.A. (06.09.03) (#03-59)
1–1
Introduction – 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents ........................................................ 1–1
1.2 M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay ............................................. 1–2
1.3 Accessories ............................................................................... 1–4
1.1 Instruction Book Contents
This instruction book is divided into six majorchapters and four appendices.
Chapter 1: IntroductionChapter one contains a brief description of the sixchapters and four appendices contained in thishandbook. It enumerates the functional capabilitiesof the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay and providesa list (see Table 1-1) of device functions. Thischapter also describes the accessories that maybe used in conjunction with application of theprotective relay.
Chapter 2: ApplicationChapter two contains specific information for theperson or group responsible for the application ofthe relay. The information provided includesfunctional diagrams, connection diagrams for typicalapplications, instructions on configuration of theunit (enabling required functions), and outputcontact assignments/input blocking designation.This chapter also illustrates the definition of systemquantities and required equipment characteristics,describes the individual function settings andoscillograph recorder setup.
Chapter 3: Operation (Front Panel)This chapter is designed for the person or groupresponsible for the operation and direct settingand configuration of the relay, and is limited toinstallations using the HMI (Human-MachineInterface) Module. This chapter includes anintroduction to the front panel controls, the functionand operation of the keypad, the characteristics ofthe display, indicators, Target Module, and thecommunication ports. It further describes theprocedures for entering all required data to theM-3520.
Also included in this chapter is a description of theoperation of the monitoring status and meteringquantities, and of viewing the target history. Thischapter references appropriate forms for recordingand communicating the described data to theparties responsible for operation and installation ofthe relay
Chapter 4: Operation (Computer)This chapter provides information for the person orgroup responsible for the operation and direct settingand configuration of the relay via personal computer,using the IPScom® M-3822 CommunicationsSoftware package. It includes installation, setupinformation, and procedures for entering all datarequired to operate the relay. Specific descriptionsof the monitoring functions, status and meteringquantities are also provided.
1–2
M-3520 Instruction Book
Chapter 5: InstallationThis chapter provides all the mechanical information,including dimensions, external connections andequipment ratings required for physical installationof the relay. For reference, the Three-Line ConnectionDiagram is repeated from Chapter 2. Acommissioning checkout procedure is outlined, usingthe HMI option and IPScom to check the externalCT and VT connections. Other tests, which may bedesirable at time of installation, are described inChapter 6.
Chapter 6: TestingThis chapter provides step-by-step test proceduresfor each M-3520 function as well as the diagnosticmode procedures and the autocalibration procedureusing the HMI.
Appendix A: Configuration Record formsThis appendix supplies a set of forms to recordand communicate the inputs required for the properoperation of the M-3520, as well as forms illustrating“As Shipped” settings for all functions.
Appendix B: CommunicationsThis appendix describes the communicationsequipment, the protocol used, the communicationports, and the port signals.
Appendix C: Self-test Error CodesThis appendix lists all the M-3520 error codes andtheir descriptions.
Appendix D: Inverse Time CurvesThis appendix contains graphs of the four standardInverse Time Curves and the four IEC overcurrentcurves.
Appendix E: Layup and StorageThis appendix includes the recommended storageparameters, periodic surveillance activities and layupconfiguration for the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay.
1.2 M-3520 Intertie ProtectionRelay
The M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay (see Figure1-1), is a microprocessor-based unit that uses digitalsignal processing technology to provide protectionto the intertie between dispersed storage andgeneration (DSG) and a utility.
The M-3520 provides 17 standard and 3 optionalprotective relay functions (see Table 1-1). Thenomenclatures of these functions are derived fromthe standards of ANSI/IEEE C37.2-1991, StandardElectric Power Systems Device Function Numbers.
Six control/status input contacts (located on rearside of unit) can be programmed to block any relayfunction and/or trigger the oscillograph recorder.Any of the functions or control/status input contactscan be individually programmed to activate one ormore of the eight programmable output contacts.
DRADNATSSNOITCNUF NOITPIRCSED
52 kcehCcnyS
72 egatlovrednU
G72/G95 egatlovrednU/egatlovrevOlartueN
23 rewoPdrawroF/esreveR
64 tnerrucrevOecneuqeSevitageN
74 egatlovrevOecneuqeSevitageN
05 tnerrucrevOsuoenatnatsnI
G05 tnerrucrevOlartueNsuoenatnatsnI
G15 tnerrucrevOlartueNemiTesrevnI
V15 egatloVhtiw,tnerrucrevOemiTesrevnItniartseRegatloVrolortnoC
95 egatlovrevO
I95 egatlovrevOkaeP
LF06 noitceteDssoLesuFTV
76 tnerrucrevOlanoitceriDesahP
N76 tnerrucrevOlanoitceriDlaudiseR
97 elbanEtcennoceR
18 ycneuqerFrednU/revO
LANOITPOSNOITCNUF NOITPIRCSED
12 ecnatsiDesahP
87 petSfotuO
R18 ycneuqerFfoegnahCfoetaR
Table 1-1 M-3520 Device Functions
1–3
Introduction – 1
With the optional M-3931 Human-Machine InterfaceModule (HMI), all functions can be set or examinedvia a local, menu-driven 2-line by 24-characterdisplay. The HMI also provides the capability forlocal metering of various quantities, includingphase, neutral, and sequence voltages andcurrents; power factor, real, reactive, and apparentpower measurements, 32 most recent events.
Also included are self-test, self-calibration anddiagnostic capabilities.
The function outputs can provide tripping and/oralarm contacts. Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) areused for the targets to provide visual indication of afunction operation. Three serial I/O ports provideremote communication capability.
A switching mode power supply provides the relaywith the various power supply voltages requiredfor operation. (A redundant power supply isavailable as an option.)
The serial interface ports, COM1 and COM2, arestandard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configuredcommunications ports. The front-panel port, COM1,is used to locally set and interrogate the M-3520 viaa portable computer. The second RS-232 port, COM2,is provided at the rear of the unit. An isolatedRS-485 communication port, COM3, is also availableat the relay’s rear terminal block. The standardconfiguration of the RS-485 port is 2-wire, 4-wiremust be specified at the time of purchase. Eitherrear-panel port, COM2 or COM3, can be used toremotely set and interrogate the M-3520 via a modem,network or direct serial connection. Detailedinformation on the use of the relay communicationsports is provided in Appendix B, Communications,as well as Chapter 4, Operation (Computer).
The unit provides up to 170 cycles of waveform datastorage assignable to up to 4 events with selectablepost-trigger delay. Once downloaded, the data canbe analyzed using the optional M-3801D IPSplot®
PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software package.
! " #! !$
% %
% %
&! &!
' #
! % !&( !
&#! !)*+
! ! !# #
$
!
&! &!
&, ) +
,,
, %
-
!
-
(
!'' .
' ) +
, ( /
%
' '(
' '(
#&#!
Figure 1-1 M-3520 Front and Rear Panels
1–4
M-3520 Instruction Book
1.3 Accessories
A copy of IPScom® communication software isshipped with each M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay.IPScom software will operate on an IBM PC-compatible computer running under Windows 95 orhigher, providing remote access to the relay viaeither direct serial connection or modem. IPScomprovides the following communication functions:
• Setpoint interrogation and modification
• Real-time metering and I/O statusmonitoring
• Stored target interrogation
• Recorded oscillograph data downloading
• Real time Phasor display
M-3915 Target ModuleThe optional target module shown in Figure 1-2includes 24 individually labeled TARGET LEDs(Light Emitting Diodes) to target the operation ofthe functions on the front panel. Eight individuallylabeled OUTPUT LEDs will be lit as long as anyoutput is picked up.
!
#&#!#0
#0
#0
#0
#0
#0
#0
#0
Figure 1-2 M-3915 Target Module
M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI)The optional HMI module, shown in Figure 1-3, providesa means to interrogate the M-3520 and to inputsettings, access data, etc. directly from the front ofthe relay. Operation of the HMI module is described indetail in Section 3.1, Front Panel Controls.
-
Figure 1-3 M-3931 Human-MachineInterface Module
M-3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph AnalysisSoftware PackageThe IPSplot PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Softwareruns in conjunction with IPScom software packageon any IBM PC-compatible computer runningWindows 95 or higher, to enable the plotting,analysis, and printing of waveform data downloadedfrom the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay.
M-3933/M-0423 Serial Communications CableThe M-3933 cable is a 10-foot RS-232 cable for usebetween the relay’s rear-panel (COM2) port and amodem. This cable has a DB25 (25-pin) connector(modem) and a DB9 (9-pin) at the M-3520 end.
The M-0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS-232cable for direct connection between a PC and therelay’s front-panel COM1 port or the rear COM2 port.This cable has DB9 (9-pin) connectors at each end.
M-3934 Redundant Low Voltage Power SupplyRedundant 24/48 VDC supply.
M-3935 Redundant High Voltage Power SupplyRedundant 110/250 VDC supply.
2–1
Application - 2
2 Application
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 2–1
2.2 System Diagrams ..................................................................... 2–2
2.3 Configuration ............................................................................. 2–4
2.4 Setpoints and Time Settings .................................................... 2–7
2.5 Oscillograph Recorder ............................................................ 2–48
2.6 Target History Recorder ......................................................... 2–49
2.7 IRIG-B Time Sync ................................................................... 2–49
2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information for the person orgroup responsible for the application of the M-3520Intertie Protection Relay. Individual relay functionscan be programmed to activate any combination ofeight output contacts (OUT1–8). Similarly, any relayfunction can be programmed to be blocked by anyof six control/status inputs (IN1–6) or the internallygenerated VT Fuse Loss Status. The relay providesprogrammable setpoints for each relay function.Some relay functions provide two or more elements,each with a magnitude setting and associated timedelay. Also, the relay includes the ability to usedifferent I/O assignments for each element, ifdesired.
This chapter is designed to assist in the applicationaspects of the Intertie Protection system. Detailedinformation on the relay functions, configuration,setpoints, functional logic schemes, and oscillographrecorder is provided.
This chapter also specifies appropriate forms forrecording and communicating the input settings tothe parties responsible for operation and installationof the relay.
2–2
M-3520 Instruction Book
2.2 System Diagrams
This function is available as astandard protective function.
This function is available as aoptional protective function.
Note: M-3520 may be purchased as abase protection system with 59, 27,81O/U,79 and 60FL functions only.
CT
M-3520
52
CT
UtilitySystem
5252
* VT
67 51V 32 2178 60FL4650
81O/U 5959I 27 47
50G
51G
59G
27G
81R
79
25
67N
Targets(Optional)
Integral HMI(Optional)
Metering
Sequence OfEvents
Waveform Capture
IRIG-B
Front RS232Communication
Multiple SettingGroups
Programmable I/O
Self Diagnostics
Dual Power Supply(Optional)
Rear RS-232/485Communication
ProgrammableLogic
VT
VT
M-3520Typical
Connection Diagram
Figure 2-1 One-Line Functional Diagram
2–3
Application - 2
A
B
C
52-2
52-1
A
B
C
35 3736 38
M-3520
A
B
C
M-3520 Typical Three-lineConnection Diagram
44 43
Power
F
R
A
B
C
A
B
C
42 41
M-3520
4142
M-3520
A B C
51 50
49 48
47 46
M-3520
53 52M-3520
40 39
VAB VBC VCA V2
36 38 4035 37 39
M-3520
44 43
V2VA VB VC
9 1110 8 16 1361 63
M-3520
34 32
15 1260 62 33 31
IN 152b
IN 2 IN 3 INRTN
52bOtherInputs
PS2 PS1
+
Self-Test
P/S OUT1
Self-TestAlarmFailure
PowerOKStatusAlarm
52-1Trip
52a
Alarm
A
B
C
A
BC
Alternate Phase VTConnection
IA
IB
IC
IG
Alternate VTConnection
Figure 2-2 Three Line Connection Diagram
NOTE: Additional inputs and outputs can be selected by user.
2–4
M-3520 Instruction Book
2.3 Configuration
FunctionsConfiguring the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relayconsists of enabling the relay functions to be used ina particular application. Once the output contacts(OUT1–8) are designated, each function will bereceptive, according to the status inputs designated(IN1–6) to block the function.
Status inputs may also initiate other actions, suchas triggering the Oscillograph Recorder. The statusinputs and output contacts need to be chosenbefore configuring the individual functions. Both canbe recorded on the Relay Configuration Table inAppendix A.
NOTE: At least one relay output must be selectedto enable a function, otherwise the functionis disabled.
Special Input/Output ConsiderationsStatus input IN1 is preassigned to be the 52b breakercontact. The FL blocking input represents theinternally generated fuse loss status.
Outputs 1–6 are form “a” contacts (normally open)and outputs 7 and 8 are form “c” contacts (centertapped “a” and “b” contacts).
Outputs 1–4 contain special circuitry which allowthem to operate slightly faster than the other outputs.
Each output may be programmed for pulse operation.The seal-in time delay setting for the particular relayoutput determines the length of time that relay isenergized when programmed for pulse operation.
NOTE: Output 8 has been especially designed tobe used as the Reconnect output. Anyprotective function assigned to this outputwill not display a target LED if it operates.
The following functions can be configured usingenable/disable output, and status input blockingdesignations:
+ 21 Phase Distance zone #1, zone #2
• 25 Sync Check
• 27 Undervoltage #1, #2
• 27G Neutral Undervoltage
• 32 Reverse/Forward Power #1, #2
• 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent, Def,Inv
• 47 Negative Sequence Overvoltage #1,#2
• 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent
• 50G Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent
• 51G Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent
• 51V Inverse Time Overcurrent with VoltageControl or Voltage Restraint
• 59 Overvoltage #1, #2
• 59I Peak Overvoltage
• 59G Neutral Overvoltage
• 60FL VT Fuse Loss
• 67 Phase Directional Overcurrent, DefiniteTime and Inverse Time
• 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent,Definite and Inverse Time
+ 78 Out of Step
• 79 Reconnect Enable
• 81 Frequency: #1,#2, #3, #4
+ 81R Rate of Change of Frequency #1, #2
“•” denotes Standard function, “+” denotes Optionalfunction
27 #1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE
27 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
This designation is required for each relay function. Afterenabling the function the user is presented with the follow-ing two screens.
This screen assigns the blocking designations (up to six) forthe enabled function. “OR” logic is used if more than oneinput is selected. If the “FL” is designated, the function will beblocked by the internally generated fuse loss status.
This screen assigns the output contacts (up to eight) forthe particular relay function. If no output contacts are as-signed, the function will be automatically disabled.
2–5
Application - 2
NOMINAL VOLTAGE________ volts
NOMINAL CURRENT________ amps
V.T. CONFIGURATIONLINE-LINE line-ground
V.T. CONFIGURATION line-gnd_to_line-line
SYNC-CHECK PHASEA b c
PHASE ROTATIONa-c-b A-B-C
PULSE RELAYo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1________ cycles
System SetupThe system setup consists of defining commoninformation such as CT and VT ratios, nominal voltageand current ratings, VT configuration, phase rotation,etc. These parameters should be entered beforeproceeding to the configuration or setpoint and time
delay settings for particular functions. The values orselections shown below are only examples. Recordand communicate the following information using theFunctional Configuration Record Form in AppendixA.
The secondary VT voltage when primary voltage isequal to the 1 per unit rating.
The secondary current of the phase CTs when the pri-mary current is equal to the 1 per unit rating. Nominalvoltage and current are used in the per unit power cal-culation.
Indicates the VT Configuration. When LINE-GROUNDis selected, functions 27 and 59 may operate forline-ground faults. If this is not desired, theLINE-GND_TO_LINE-LINE selection may be used.When LINE-GND TO LINE-LINE is selected, the re-lay internally calculates line-line voltages fromline-ground voltages for all voltage-sensitive func-tions. This Line-Ground to Line-Line selection shouldbe used only for a VT nominal secondary voltage of69 V (not for 120 V). For this selection, the nominalvoltage entered should be line-line nominal voltage,which is eeeee3 times line-ground nominal voltage. TheV2 connected VT must be configured line-ground ifVT CONFIGURATION from above is LINE-GROUND. If VT configuration is LINE-LINE or LINE-GND_TO_LINE-LINE, then V2 must be configuredline-line.
Indicates selected phase for sync check (25) function.
Phase Rotation.
Indicates outputs chosen for pulse operation. Whenselected, output will remain energized for the timedelay specified in the RELAY SEAL-IN TIME (seebelow), and then drop out. With pulse operation, theselected relay will drop out after the delay, even ifthe tripping function remains out of band.
Minimum time the output contact will remain pickedup to ensure proper seal-in, regardless of the sub-sequent state of the initiating function. Individual Seal-In settings are available for all outputs.
2–6
M-3520 Instruction Book
Selects the active state of the six status inputs. Whenhighlighted (uppercase), the active state is an opencircuit. When lowercase, the active state is closed cir-cuit (default)
By enabling the DELTA-Y TRANSFORM, the relaywill internally consider the 30° phase shift throughthe delta-wye unit transformer for 51V and 21 func-tions.
Ratio of the phase VT’s
Ratio of the V2 VT
Ratio of the neutral VT
Ratio of the phase CTs
Ratio of the neutral CT
ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/closei6 i5 i4 I3 i2 i1
DELTA-Y TRANSFORMDISABLE enable
V.T. PHASE RATIO1.0:1
V.T. V2 RATIO1.0:1
V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO1.0:1
C.T. PHASE RATIO10.1:
C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO10:1
2–7
Application - 2
2.4 Setpoints and Time Settings
21 Phase DistanceThe phase distance function, designed for systemphase fault protection, is implemented as a two-zone mho characteristic. Three separate distanceelements are implemented to detect AB, BC, andCA fault types. The diameter, offset, systemimpedance angle (relay characteristic angle), anddefinite time delay need to be selected for eachzone for coordination with the system relaying in thespecific application.
When the Dispersed Generation (DG) is connectedto the system through a delta/wye transformer,proper voltages and currents (equivalent to the highside of the transformer) must be used in order forthe relay to see correct impedances for systemfaults. By enabling the delta/wye transform feature(see Section 2.2, System Diagrams), the relay caninternally consider the 30° phase shift through thedelta-wye unit transformer, saving auxiliary VT costs.
Table 2-1 Impedance Calculation
2–8
M-3520 Instruction Book
3
52
Protected RangeZone 1
Protected RangeZone 2
52G
21
M-3520
Figure 2-3 Phase Distance (21) Zones of Protection
+jX
+R
–jX
–R
Zone 2
Zone 1
CircleDiameters
SystemImpedance
Angle
Transformer
Transmission Line
Figure 2-4 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Phase Faults
2–9
Application - 2
21 #1 DIAMETER________ Ohms
21 #1 OFFSET________ Ohms
21 #1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees
21 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
21 #2 DIAMETER________ Ohms
21 #2 OFFSET________ Ohms
21 #2 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees
21 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
Typically, the first zone of protection is set to an imped-ance value in excess of the first external protective section(typically the transformer plus part of the transmissionline) to ensure operation for faults within that protectivezone (see Figure 2-4). The second #21 zone can beset for the second external section of protection on thesystem (typically transmission Zone 1 distance relays)plus adequate overreach.
A negative or positive offset can be specified to offsetthe mho circle from the origin. This offset is usually setat zero.
The impedance angle should be set as closely as pos-sible to the actual impedance angle of the zone beingprotected.
The time delays are set to coordinate with the primaryprotection of those overreached zones and, when ap-plicable, with the breaker failure schemes associatedwith those protective zones.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
All primary impedances (ZPRI ) must be reflected to relay quantities (ZSEC ). The primary ohms (ZPRI ) on thegenerator base needs to be multiplied by the ratio of the current transformer ratio (RC ) to the voltagetransformer ratio (RV ).
Z SEC = ZPRI x (RC ÷ RV)
2–10
M-3520 Instruction Book
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Impedance Angle:
Delay:
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Impedance Angle:
Delay:
0.1 Ohms
-100.0 Ohms
0o
1 Cycle
0.1 Ohms
-100.0 Ohms
0o
1 Cycle
100.0 Ohms
100.0 Ohms
90o
8160 Cycles
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
100.0 Ohms
100.0 Ohms
90o
8160 Cycles
Blocking Input
Blocking InputOUTPUT @
@
#1
#2
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(21) - PHASE DISTANCE
Figure 2-5 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(21) Phase Distance
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–11
Application - 2
25 Sync CheckThe Synchronism (Sync) Check function is used toensure that the voltage magnitude, phase angleand frequency of the Dispersed Generation (DG)(V2) and the utility system (V1) are within acceptablelimits before the intertie breaker is closed.
The sync check function has phase angle, deltafrequency, and delta voltage checks.
Phase Angle CheckThe phase angle is considered OK when theselected sync phase voltage (V1) and DG voltageare within the Upper Volt Limit and Lower Volt Limitwindow and the measured phase angle is withinthe phase angle window.
Phase angle window is defined as twice the PhaseAngle Limit setting. For example, if the Phase AngleLimit is set at 10 degrees, a phase angle window of20 degrees exists between -10 degrees and +10degrees. The basic diagram of the phase anglecheck is shown in Figures 2-6 and 2-7.
Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency CheckDelta voltage and delta frequency elements may beindividually enabled or disabled, as desired. Deltavoltage check will compare the absolute differencebetween the selected sync phase voltage (V1) andthe measured DG voltage (V2) with the Delta Voltlimit setting. Likewise, the delta frequency measuresthe frequency difference between V1 and V2 voltagesignals. The logic diagram of the above is shown inFigures 2-6 and 2-7.
Dead Line/Dead Bus Check
The Dead Volt Limit defines the Hot/Dead voltagelevel used in deadline/dead bus closing schemes.When the measured V2 voltage is equal to orbelow the Dead Volt Limit, V2 is considered dead.When the measured V2 is above the Dead VoltLimit, V2 is considered hot. The opposite side ofthe breaker uses the positive sequence voltagemeasurement (V1 below) for 3-phase considerationin determining hot/dead detection. Different com-binations of hot line/dead bus closings may beselected, depending on how the buses are refer-enced. The logic diagram of the deadline/deadbus scheme is shown in Figures 2-6 and 2-7.
The Dead V1, Dead V2, and Dead V1 & V2 enableare software switches used to enable the dead line/dead bus logic. Further conditioning can beperformed on the dead detection logic by selectingone or more input contacts (Dead Input Enable) tocontrol the enabled dead detection element. Forexample, if INPUT2 (I2) is selected under the Dead
Input Enable screen, and both the Dead V1 andDead V2 elements are enabled, the dead checktimer will start when INPUT2 is activated, and eitherV1 dead/V2 hot or V1 hot/V2 dead. This allows forexternal control of the desired dead closing scheme.Dead Input Enable selections are common to alldead detection elements. If no inputs are selectedunder the Dead Input Enable screen, and any deadelement is enabled, the dead check timer will startimmediately when the dead condition exists. Thelogic diagram in Figure 2-7 shows enabling/disablingof the dead line/dead bus scheme through contactinputs.
Eventually, the dead line/dead bus check, phaseangle check, delta volt and delta frequency checksall combine through their appropriate timers andare directed to the programmed 25 output relay.The overall logic of the Sync Check (25) function isshown in Figure 2-7.
Supervision of 25 by 79The Sync Check function (25) can be supervised bythe reconnect enable (79) function. The “79 supervise25” setting, if enabled, will hold both the dead checkand sync check timers reset until the 79 timer expires.This, in effect, allows the 79 function to supervisethe 25 operation. Neither the 25 nor the 79 functionare considered “tripping” functions, and therefore donot generate target information by default.
CAUTION: Outputs chosen for the 79 and 25functions should not be selected as target outputsin the Target Setup section. Advanced programmingusing the IPSutil™ program allows user to redefineeither or both the 25 and 79 functions as targetoutputs.
2–12
M-3520 Instruction Book
Phase Angle Check Logic
Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Logic
Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Input Initiate Logic
Dead Input Enable
AND
ORAND
ANDAND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR 2
OR 3
1
AND
AND AND
AND
AND
(V 1- V 2) < Delta V Limit
Delta V Is Enabled
Delta F Is Enabled
V1 Lower Voltage Limit>
V1 Upper Voltage Limit<
V2 Lower Voltage Limit>
V2 Upper Voltage Limit<
Phase Angle Phase Limit<
(F 1- F 2) < Delta F Limit
Phase Angle OK To Figure 2-7
AND
AND
(V 1- V 2) < Delta V Limit
Delta V Is Enabled
Delta F Is Enabled
(F 1- F 2) < Delta F Limit
Delta V and Delta F Check LogicWith Delta V OR Delta F Enabled
Delta V and Delta F Check LogicWith Delta V AND Delta F Enabled
V1pos Dead Limit<
Dead V1 Enabled
V2 > Dead Limit
Dead V2 Enabled
V1pos Dead Limit<
V2 < Dead Limit
V2 < Dead Limit
Dead V1 & V2 Enabled
V1pos Dead Limit<
V2 > Dead LimitDead V1 Enabled
V1pos Dead Limit>
V1pos Dead Limit>
V2 < Dead Limit AND
Dead V2 Enabled
Selected INPUT Is Activated
To Figure 2-7
To Figure 2-7
AND
Figure 2-6 Logic Diagrams
2–13
Application - 2
DeadCheckTimer
SyncCheckTimer
OutputSeal In
Timer
SyncCheckTimer
DeadCheckTimer
79Reconnect
Timer
OutputSeal In
Timer
Sync Check (25) Function Logic
Phase Angle, Delta V and Delta F Logic
Dead Line/Dead Bus Logic
Dead Line/Dead BusCheck Input Initiate Logic
FromFigure 2-6
(79) Supervise (25) Function Logic
Phase Angle, Delta V and Delta F Logic
Dead Line/Dead Bus Logic
Dead Line/Dead BusCheck Input Initiate Logic
FromFigure 2-6
79 Reconnect LogicFrom Figure 2-31
79 Supervise 25Enabled
FromFigure 2-6
25 OutputContact
25 OutputContact
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OROR
1
2
3
1
2
3
Figure 2-7 Function 25/79 Logic Diagrams
2–14
M-3520 Instruction Book
79 SUPERVISE 25disable ENABLE
25 PHASE LIMIT________ Degrees
25 UPPER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 LOWER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 SYNC CHECK DELAY________ Cycles
25 DELTA VOLTdisable ENABLE
25 DELTA VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 DELTA FREQUENCYdisable ENABLE
25 DELTA FREQUENCY LIMIT________ Hz
25 DEAD VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 DEAD V1disable ENABLE
25 DEAD V2disable ENABLE
25 DEAD V1 & V2DISABLE enable
If enabled, 79 timer will control 25 function.
Phase angle setting.
Upper voltage limit for voltage acceptance.
Lower voltage limit for voltage acceptance.
Sync check time delay.
Delta voltage element.
Delta voltage setting.
Delta frequency element.
Delta frequency setting.
Voltage less than this setting is defined as “DEAD”; abovethis setting as “HOT”.
Enables Dead V1/Hot V2 setting.
Enables Hot V1/Dead V2 setting.
Enables Dead V1/Dead V2 closing.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–15
Application - 2
25 DEAD INPUT ENABLEi6 i5 i4 I3 i2 i1
25 DEAD DELAY________ Cycles
Externally controlled dead closing.
Dead delay timer setting.
Phase Angle Window:
Upper Voltage Limit:
Lower Voltage Limit:
Sync Check Delay:
Dead Voltage Limit:
Dead Time Delay:
#1
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(25) - SYNC CHECK
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1Input Initiate
Delta Voltage:
Enable Disable
Delta Frequency: 0.001 Hz 0.500 Hz
Enable Disable
Dead V1 Hot V2 Hot V1 Dead V2 Dead V1 Dead V2
Supervised by Function 79
Save
Cancel
0o
60 V
40 V
1 Cycle
0 V
1 Cycle
90o
140 V
120 V
8160 Cycles
60 V
8160 Cycles
1.0 V 50.0 V
Figure 2-8 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(25) Sync Check
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–16
M-3520 Instruction Book
27 #1 PICKUP________ Volts
27 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
27 #2 PICKUP________ Volts
27 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
27 Undervoltage, 3 PhaseVoltage is commonly suggested as an efficientmeans to protect against islanding. Notably, unlessthe DG includes very high-speed generatorexcitation response, the island case where load isgreater than generation will result in a rapid drop ofvoltage. Except for those systems prone toferroresonance, the voltage waveform will remain
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(27) - UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
#2
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Figure 2-9 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(27) Undervoltage
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
Relay volts are equal to the primary bus voltage divided bythe VT ratio.
The operating time of the function.
essentially sinusoidal, making the use of rms valueof fundamental frequency component as themeasurement for this function. An IEEE suggestionis that undervoltage relays be set at 90% to 95% ofnominal voltage (in accordance with the lower limitallowed for supply to customers) with a 1 secondtime delay to prevent incorrect operation from avoltage dip caused by an external fault.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–17
Application - 2
32 Directional PowerDirectional power protection is available in eitherthe Reverse Overpower, Reverse Underpower,Forward Overpower or Forward Underpowerconfiguration presented below. A power importand export convention that considers DG, Utilityand the M-3520 perspectives is also included. Thedirectional power function provides two powerelements, each with a direction setting, magnitudesetting and time delay, and configurable as anunderpower or overpower element.
The directional power function provides protectionagainst large power import or power export by anDG to a utility. Forward power is defined as powerexported from an DG to a Utility, and reverse poweris defined as power imported by an DG from aUtility (see Figures 2-1 and 2-2).
Two power elements are provided, each with amagnitude setting and time delay. The setting rangeis from –3.000 PU to 3.000 PU. The choice of thebase PU is typically taken from the MVA rating ofthe interconnection transformer, the DG’saggregate generating capacity or some other valueagreed upon by the DG and the utility. NormalizedPU power flow measurements are based on theNominal Voltage and Nominal Current setting, asshown in Section 2.3, Configuration.
If the DG is allowed to supply power to the Utility(export), the forward overpower function can beused to limit the amount of power flow into theUtility. The reverse underpower function can beused to ensure that the DG is importing a minimalamount of power from the utility, therefore providinga supplemental means of loss of parallel operationprotection.
Configuration ProcessThe directional power elements are individuallyconfigured as follows:
1. Input the desired pick up value, positive(forward) or negative (reverse).
a. Positive pick up value – Places thepick up point in the forward powerarea of the element, creating aforward power element.
b. Negative pick up value – Places thepick up point in the reverse powerarea of the element, creating areverse power element.
2. Select either Overpower or Underpowerapplication:Overpower Modea. Reverse Overpower – An increase
in reverse power flow that exceedsthe pick up value will cause a trip.
b. Forward Overpower – An increasein forward power flow that exceedsthe pick up value will cause a trip.
Underpower Modea. Reverse Underpower Mode – A
decrease in reverse power flow thatis below the pick up value will causea trip.
b. Forward Underpower Mode – Adecrease in forward power flow thatis below the pick up value will causea trip.
CAUTION: Proper CT polarity is important indefining the direction of power flow. Refer to Figure 2-2 for proper connections.
32 # 1 & #2 Pickup – If the pickup is set positive,the element is a forward power element. If thepickup is set negative, the element is a reversepower element.
32 #1 & #2 Delay – Power relays should be appliedwith a time delay to prevent mis-operationduring power swing, heavy load pick up or heavyload rejection conditions.
2–18
M-3520 Instruction Book
REVERSE OVERPOWER
NOTRIP
TRIP
Pick up
Reverse --- Relay --- ForwardImport --- DG --- ExportExport --- Utility --- Import
FORWARD UNDERPOWER
NOTRIP
TRIP
Pick up
FORWARD OVERPOWER
NOTRIP TRIP
Pick up
REVERSE UNDERPOWER
NOTRIP
TRIP
Pick up
Reverse --- Relay --- ForwardImport --- DG --- ExportExport --- Utility --- Import
Reverse --- Relay --- ForwardImport --- DG --- ExportExport --- Utility --- Import
Reverse --- Relay --- ForwardImport --- DG --- ExportExport --- Utility --- Import
Figure 2-10 Directional Power Configurations
2–19
Application - 2
!"#$%$
!&'''&&
()*
&'''&&
+(,')*
-(
$./%./+ 0 , 1 2 ( , 1 2 (
3 4
$5676 . 676
/86%89 9: 9:
!&'''&&
()*
&'''&&
+(,')*
-(
$./%./+ 0 , 1 2 ( , 1 2 (
3 4
$5676 . 676
/86%89 9: 9:
95
)9
%3
9*
%3
9*
Figure 2-11 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Directional Power (32) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(32) Directional Power
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
32 #1 PICKUP________ PU
32 #1 OVER/UNDER POWERover_power under_power
32 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
32#1 THREE PHASE DETECTdisable ENABLE
32 #2 PICKUP________ PU
32 #2 OVER/UNDER POWERover_power under_power
32 #2 delay________ Cycles
32 #2 THREE PHASE DETECTdisable ENABLE
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable
This screen present if VT configuration is set Line-to-Ground.
This screen present if VT configuration is set Line-to-Ground.
2–20
M-3520 Instruction Book
46 Negative Sequence OvercurrentThe Negative Sequence Overcurrent function pro-vides protection against possible damage due tounbalanced current conditions.
This function has a definite time element and aninverse time element. The definite time pickup valueand operating time are normally associated with analarm function. The inverse time element is usuallyassociated with a trip function.
The inverse time function can be selected as one ofthe eight curve families: definite, inverse, veryinverse, extremely inverse, and four IEC curves.The operator selects the pickup and time dialsettings.
This protection must not operate for system faultsthat will be cleared by feeder/line relaying. Thisrequires consideration of feeder line protection,bus differential, and breaker failure backupprotections.
46DT PICKUP________ Amps
46DT DELAY________ Cycles
46IT PICKUP________ Amps
46IT CURVEDEF in vinv einv
46IT TIME DIAL________
Negative sequence overcurrent pickup establishes the nega-tive sequence overcurrent level above which the functiontimer will start.
This setting is the operating time of the function.
Negative sequence overcurrent pickup establishes the nega-tive sequence overcurrent level above which the functiontimer will start.
This setting selects, one of eight family of curves, as shownin Appendix D, Figures D-1 through D-8.
The appropriate curve in the selected family of curves ischosen here.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–21
Application - 2
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(46) - NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT
Pickup:
Delay:
Def. Time
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
0.10 Amp
1 Cycle
20.00 Amps
8160 Cycles
Pickup:
Delay:
Inv. Time
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Curves
Definite Time
IECI
Inverse
IECVI
Very Inverse
IECEI
Extremely Inverse
IECLTI
0.50 Amp
0.5
5.00 Amps
11.0
Figure 2-12 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) SetpointRanges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(46) Negative Sequence Overcurrent
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–22
M-3520 Instruction Book
47 Negative Sequence OvervoltageThe Negative Sequence Overvoltage function 47provides protection for voltage imbalance andreverse phase sequence.
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(47) - NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
#2
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Figure 2-13 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Negative Sequence Overvoltage (47) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(47) Negative Sequence Overvoltage
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
47#1 PICKUP________ Volts
47#1 DELAY________ Cycles
47#2 PICKUP________ Volts
47#2 DELAY________ Cycles
A pickup setting in the range of 10 to 30 V can reliablydetect open phases and reverse phase sequence.
A minimum time delay of 6 to 10 cycles will preventmisoperation during switching transients.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–23
Application - 2
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent, 3-PhaseThe Instantaneous Phase (50) functions providefast tripping times for high fault currents. The settingsfor 50 should be chosen such that they will notrespond to faults on the adjacent system.
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(50) - INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERCURRENT
1.0 Amp 240.0 Amps#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Figure 2-14 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50) SetpointRanges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(50) Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
If this function is enabled, the following setting is applicable:
50 PICKUP________ Amps
2–24
M-3520 Instruction Book
50G Instantaneous Overcurrent, NeutralThe Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50G) functionprovides fast tripping times for high fault currents.The settings for 50G should be chosen such thatthey will not respond to faults on the adjacent system.
!"#$% % &''% &('%
)*
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
445 6 6
+2 7! 5 1/"7" 5
Figure 2-15 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50G) SetpointRanges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(50G) Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
50G PICKUP________ Amps
DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable ENABLE
Pickup setting.
50G may be directionally controlled. See 67N function formaximum sensitivity angle and polarization setup.
2–25
Application - 2
51V Inverse Time Overcurrent, with VoltageControl or Voltage RestraintTime overcurrent relays are basic to any protectionscheme. This is the main function used to trip circuitsselectively and to time coordinate them with otherup or downstream devices. For this function, eightcomplete series of inverse time characteristics areincluded. The eight curve families to be chosenfrom are definite, inverse, very inverse, extremelyinverse, and four IEC curves. The pickup and timedial settings are selected from the relay menu.
The curves available for use are shown inAppendix D, Figures D-1 through D-8. Theycover a range from 1.5 to 20 times the tap. Forcurrents beyond 20 times the pickup setting, therelay operating time will remain the same as the timeat 20 times the pickup setting. The 51V function hasvoltage control or voltage restraint elements. Undercertain conditions, the Dispersed Generation (DG)steady-state fault currents during a three-phase faultcan decrease to below the full load current. In orderto provide overcurrent protection for those conditions,the voltage control/restraint element should beenabled. The particular settings will be made byinformation from short-circuit (fault) studies andknowledge of the coordination requirements with otherdevices in the system that respond to timeovercurrent.
When voltage restraint is selected, the tap setting ofthe 51VR is modified continuously according to thevoltage inputs. The relay continues to operateindependently of current decrement in the machine.The voltage restraint function is well-suited to smallgenerators with relatively short time constants.
Voltage restraint is disabled when shipped fromfactory. When the generator is connected to thesystem through a delta/wye transformer, propervoltages (equivalent to the high-side of thetransformer) should be used for the 51VR or 51VCelement. The M-3520 can internally determine theequivalent high-side voltages of the delta/wye unittransformer, saving auxiliary instrument transformercosts. The voltage-current pairs used are shown inTable 2-2.
For voltage controlled operation, the function is notactive unless the voltage is below the voltage controlsetpoint, which can be used to help confirm that theovercurrent is due to a system fault. When applied,most users will set voltage control in the range of0.7 to 0.9 per unit rms voltage. Voltage control isdisabled when shipped from the factory.
The various features of the 51V function, such asvoltage control, voltage restraint, voltagetransformations (for delta-wye unit transformers)are configurable.
NOTE: This function should be blocked by fuseloss if in the voltage control mode. Fuseloss blocking is not desirable for therestraint mode because the pickup isautomatically held at 100% Tap Setting(see Figure 2-20) during fuse lossconditions, and will continue to operatecorrectly.
Table 2-2 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage–Current Pairs
2–26
M-3520 Instruction Book
Sets phase current pickup for 51V.
Selects one of the eight inverse time curves as shown inAppendix D, Figures D-1 through D-8.
The appropriate curve in the selected family of curves ischosen here.
Restraint/control setting.
Voltage control level.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
51V PICKUP________ Amps
51V CURVEDEF inv vinv einv
51V TIME DIAL________
51V VOLTAGE CONTROLdisable V_CNTL v_rstrnt
51V VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts
Figure 2-16 Voltage Restraint (51V) Characteristic
2–27
Application - 2
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(51V) - INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT W/VOLTAGE CONTROL OR VOLTAGE RESTRAIN
#10.50 Amp
0.5
12.00 Amps
11.0
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Curves
Definite Time
IECI
Inverse
IECVI
Very Inverse
IECEI
Extremely Inverse
IECLTI
Voltage Control: 5 V 180 V
Disable Voltage Control Voltage Restrain
Pickup:
Delay:
Figure 2-17 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint (51V) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(51V) Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–28
M-3520 Instruction Book
51G Inverse Time Neutral OvercurrentNeutral Inverse Time Overcurrent relay is used totrip circuits selectively for ground faults, and to timecoordinate with up or down stream relays. For thisfunction, eight complete series of inverse timecharacteristics are included. The eight curve familiesto be chosen are definite, inverse, very inverse,extremely inverse, and four IEC curves. Theoperator selects the time dial within each familysetting and pickup setting through the M-3520 menu.
The curves available for use are shown in AppendixD, Figures D-1 through D-8. They cover a rangefrom 1.5 to 20 times the pickup. For currents beyond20 times the pickup setting, the relay operating timewill remain the same as the time at 20 times thepickup setting.
!*#$(%8'% &('%
+2
9
)*"71! 5
"7!
*17"" 5
**7"
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
4
:%5
4
(
(494
;4594
%
445 6 6
Figure 2-18 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51G) SetpointRanges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(51G) Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
Sets ground current pickup.
Selects one of the eight inverse time curves as shown inAppendix D, Figures D-1 through D-8.
The appropriate curve in the selected family of curves ischosen here.
51G may be directionally controlled. See 67N function formaximum sensitivity angle and polarization setup.
51G PICKUP________ Amps
51G CURVEDEF inv vinv einv
51G TIME DIAL________
DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable ENABLE
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–29
Application - 2
59I Peak OvervoltageMost overvoltage relays operate based on the RMSvalue of voltage. There is, however, a systemphenomenon known as ferroresonance which mayoccur on a lightly loaded, islanded system. As thename implies, a system experiencingferroresonance is in resonance, but the inductanceis highly nonlinear, being variable as the transformercore cycles in and out of magnetic saturation. Atthis time, the voltage waveform will be expected tobe very rich in harmonics, to the extent that it ispossible that the peak voltage of the nonsinusoidalwave will be dangerously high, even though theRMS value of the same voltage remains in anacceptable range.
Because it is necessary to describe voltage for thispurpose in terms of the peak value of voltage (notRMS), it is convenient to define the parametersetpoints in per unit of the peak of the nominalsinusoidal waveform. The per unit value is basedon the nominal voltage setting. As an example, fora nominal voltage of 120 V, the one per unitinstantaneous peak voltage is 120 x S2 = 170 V.
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(59I) - PEAK OVERVOLTAGE
Magnitude:
Delay:
1.05 p.u.
1 Cycle
1.50 p.u.
8160 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Figure 2-19 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Peak Overvoltage (59I) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(59I) Peak Overvoltage
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
59I PICKUP________ PU
59I DELAY________ Cycles
Typical pickup setting is between 1.3 to 1.5 PU.
A time delay of 10 cycles provides fast protection and pre-vents misoperation during system disturbances.
2–30
M-3520 Instruction Book
59 Overvoltage, 3-PhaseVoltage is commonly suggested as an efficientmeans to protect against islanding. Notably, unlessthe Dispersed Generation (DG) includes veryhigh-speed generator excitation response, the islandcase where load is less than generation will resultin a rapid rise of voltage. Except for those systemsprone to ferroresonance, the voltage waveform willremain essentially sinusoidal, making the use ofrms value of the fundamental frequency componentas the measurement.
IEEE suggests that the first setpoint (with a shorttime delay) be set up at 150% of the nominal voltage,and the second setpoint (with a long time delay) beset at 106 to 110% of the nominal voltage to preventnuisance trips (Intertie Protection of Consumer-Owned Sources of Generation, 3 MVA or Less;IEEE Publication 88TH0224-6-PWR).
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(59) - OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
#2
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Figure 2-20 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Phase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(59) Phase Overvoltage
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
59 #1 PICKUP________ Volts
59 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
59 #2 PICKUP________ Volts
59 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
Pickup and Time Delay settings for 59 function. Settypically at 130% to 150%
Set typically at 3 to 6 cycles.
Set typically at 106% to 110%.
Set typically at 30 to 60 cycles.
2–31
Application - 2
59G/27G Overvoltage/Undervoltage, NeutralCircuit or Zero SequenceThe neutral Overvoltage/Undervoltage functions 59G/27G provide protection for ground faults on thesystem.
!<#$'% &((&%
+2
9
!(
*9
*,"(
,*."9
)*
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
Figure 2-21 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Neutral Overvoltage (59G) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(59G) Neutral Overvoltage
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
Applications of 59G/27G, shown in Figures 2-27 and2-28, are for detecting ground faults on the utilityside of the power transformer. Protection schemesare applied based on using one or three voltagetransformers (VT).
27G PICKUP________ Volts
27G DELAY________ Cycles
59G PICKUP________ Volts
59G DELAY________ Cycles
If these functions are enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–32
M-3520 Instruction Book
1-#$'% '(&%
83
9
!(
*9
*,"(
,*."9
)*
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
Figure 2-22 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Neutral Undervoltage (27G) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(27G) Neutral Undervoltage
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–33
Application - 2
Ground Fault Detection using 59G and Broken-Delta VTsThe 59G may be used to detect system phasevoltage unbalance in conjunction with three VTs.To do so, the VT secondaries are connected in“broken” delta; i.e., they are in delta except that onecorner is open, and the 59G device is inserted, asillustrated in Figure 2-23.
In this case, voltage at 59G in Figure 2-24 will bezero so long as the three-phase voltages arebalanced, but will rise above zero with any zero-sequence unbalanced condition, as will be expectedwith any real world utility ground fault.
A
B
C
PowerTransformer
a
b
c
59G
Resistor
To Dispersed Storageand Generation (DSG) To Utility
Figure 2-23 Ground Fault Detection Using 59G and Broken-Delta VTs
When the relay burden is small, the transformers in this scheme will be subject to ferroresonance and highvoltage oscillations unless a shunt resistor is used. The shunt resistor will damp high transient voltageoscillations, and will usually hold peak values to less than twice normal crest voltage to ground (AppliedProtective Relaying, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, 1982).
seulaVlacipyT
oitaRTV R
021/0042 052 Ω
021/0024 521 Ω
021/0027 09 Ω
021/00441 06 Ω
Table 2-3 Typical Shunt Resistor Values
2–34
M-3520 Instruction Book
For this scheme to work, the capacitance to groundof the lines must be fairly closely balanced andhigh enough to keep the neutral of the system atclose to ground potential. The shunt resistor helpsto minimize the chance of ferroresonance or neutralinversion. (Applied Protective Relaying,Westinghouse Electric Corporation, 1982.)
Caution: This scheme should be used withcaution since it can result in high overvoltages dueto ferroresonance and neutral inversion.
Ground Fault Detection Using 27G and 59G withOne VTAn alternate, but not recommended, scheme usesthe 27G and 59G functions with one VT rated forline-to-line voltage, but connected from any onephase to ground as shown in Figure 2-24. Thisscheme will detect the most common line-to-groundfaults in the following manner:
• A fault on the phase that includes the VTwill pull that phase voltage low and initiateoperation of the 27G function.
• A fault on either phase without the VT willresult in line-to-line voltage (or S3 x normalline-to-neutral voltage) appearing at theVT, initiating operation of the 59G function.
A
B
C
PowerTransformer
a
b
c
To DispersedGeneration (DG) To Utility
V
V L-L
Fault on phase 'a' V = 027G detects Undervoltage
27G 59GR
Fault on phase 'b' or 'c'V = V LL 59G detects
Overvoltage
Figure 2-24 Ground Fault Detection Using 27G and 59G with One VT
2–35
Application - 2
60FL Fuse LossSince some functions may inadvertently operatewhen a VT fuse is blown, provisions are incorporatedfor both internal and external fuse loss detection.Functions which misoperate on VT fuse loss suchas 21, 32, 51V, 67, and 67N can be programmed todisable during a VT fuse-loss condition. The statusof the fuses can then be monitored using remotecommunications or locally if the optional M-3931HMI Module is in service.
For internal detection of a fuse-loss condition,positive and negative sequence quantities arecompared. The presence of negative sequencevoltage in the absence of negative sequence currentis considered to be a fuse loss condition. Anadditional supervising condition includes a minimumpositive sequence voltage to assure VT inputs arebeing applied to the relay.
A timer, associated with the fuse loss logic, isavailable, to assure proper coordination forconditions which may appear as a fuse loss suchas secondary VT circuit faults which will be clearedby local low voltage circuit action.
For the specific application where the above logiccannot be considered reliable (such as when currentinputs to the relay are not connected, sustainedpositive sequence current during fault conditions isminimal, or negative sequence currents are notpresent during fault conditions), provision is madefor disabling the 60FL Fuse Loss internal logic bynot selecting “FL” from the 60FL Input Initiatechoices.
Provision is also made in the relay to input externalstatus contact(s) of other fuse loss detectionprotection. These external contacts may be input toany of the input contacts (IN1 to IN6) andprogrammed to initiate the 60FL function.
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(60FL) - VT FUSE-LOSS DETECTION
Time Delay: 1 Cycle 8160 Cycles 60FL
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1Input Initiate
Figure 2-25 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(60FL) Fuse-Loss Detection
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
The initiating inputs are user-designated. The operation ofany of the externally-connected contacts (across theseM-3520 inputs) will start the associated time delay to the60FL function operation.
The time delay is to be set to coordinate for conditionswhich may appear as a fuse loss but will be corrected byother protection (such as a secondary VT circuit fault whichwill be cleared by low voltage circuit action).
60FL INPUT INITIATEFL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
60FL DELAY________ Cycles
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–36
M-3520 Instruction Book
67 Phase Directional OvercurrentFor intertie protection applications, the phasedirectional overcurrent relay allows greaterselectivity for utility system faults, since thedirectional element can be set to look directlytowards the utility system. When the directionalelement is disabled, the 67DT operates like aninstantaneous overcurrent. Likewise, the 67ITfunction operates like an inverse time overcurrentfunction (51) when its directional element is disabled.Special high-speed processing occurs when the67DT time delay is set to minimum (1 cycle). Athree-phase option on the 67DT function allows the67DT to only respond to 3-phase faults. When three-
phase detection is disabled, and any one phasecurrent exceeds pickup, timing will begin. Thedirectional elements are polarized from positivesequence voltage and positive sequence current.In order to obtain maximum sensitivity for faultcurrents, the directional element is provided with amaximum sensitivity angle adjustment (MSA). Thissetting is common to both the 67DT and 67ITelements. The directional detection algorithm isequipped with a pre-fault voltage memory of eightcycles to provide correct directional discriminationfor bolted three-phase faults.
Figure 2-26 Phase Directional Overcurrent (67) Trip Characteristics
2–37
Application - 2
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
67DT PICKUP________ Amps
67DT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable ENABLE
67DT THREE PHASE DETCTDISABLE enable
67DT DELAY________ Cycles
67IT PICKUP________ Amps
67IT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable ENABLE
67IT CURVEdef INV vinv einv
67 IT TIME DIAL________
67 MAX SENSITIVITY ANGLE________ DEGREES
Pickup value for the 67DT element.
Directional discrimination enable. When disabled, this func-tion will work like a standard overcurrent function (50DT).
When enabled, all three phase currents must exceed thesetpoint for the function to operate.
Time delay. When programmed for 1 cycle, high-speedoperation results (.75 0.5 cycles).
Pickup value for the 67IT setting.
Directional discrimination enable. When disabled, this func-tion will work like a standard inverse time overcurrent relay(51).
Curve Selection. Four standard curves and four IEC curvesare available.
Time Dial Setting.
Used to polarize the directional elements. This setting iscommon to both the 67DT and 67IT when the directionalelements are enabled.
2–38
M-3520 Instruction Book
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(67) - PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Save
Cancel
Def. Time
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Three Phase Detection: Enable Disable
Phase Directional Element: Enable Disable
Pickup:
Delay:
1.0 Amp
1 Cycle
240.0 Amps
8160 Cycles
Max Sensitivity: 0o 359o
Inv. Time
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Time Dial:
0.50 Amp
0.5
12.00 Amps
11.0
Curves
Definite Time
IECI
Inverse
IECVI
Very Inverse
IECEI
Extremely Inverse
IECLTI
Phase Directional Element: Enable Disable
Figure 2-27 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Phase Directional Overcurrent (67) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(67) Phase Directional Overcurrent
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–39
Application - 2
67N Residual Directional OvercurrentThe neutral directional overcurrent (67N) functionprovides protection from ground faults. This functionincludes an inverse time overcurrent element, anda directional element. The directional element maybe polarized as five different types:
Type 1: 3V0 and 3I
0, where V
0 and I
0 are zero-
sequence voltage and zero sequence currentcalculated by the relay, using phase voltages andcurrents, respectively.
Type 2: VG (broken delta voltage applied at the V
Ginput) and 3I
0.
Type 3: 3V2 and 3I
2, where V
2 and I
2 are negative
sequence voltage and current, respectively.
Type 4: IG and 3I
0, where I
G is the neutral current
(typically connected to the transformer neutral).
Type 5: Dual polarized with Type 1 or Type 4.
All types are designed to trip using 3I0 current.
Polarizations 1, 3, and 5 shall not be used with L-L orLG to L-L VT selection. When using polarizations 4or 5, MSA is not applicable and should be set tozero.
NOTE: When IG is connected as the residual
current from phase CTs, type 4 and 5must not be used.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
67N PICKUP________ Amps
67N DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable ENABLE
67N DELAY________ Cycles
67N MAX SENSITIVITY ANGLE________ Degrees
67NIT POLARIZATIONTYPE1 type2 type3
Pickup value for the 67N element.
Directional discrimination enable. When disabled, thisfunction will work like a 51N.
Time Dial setting.
Used to polarize the directional elements. This includespolarizations 1, 2, and 3. For polarizations 4 and 5, thevalue should be set to zero. These settings are foundunder the RESIDUAL DIR SETUP screen.
2–40
M-3520 Instruction Book
.-#$' %& &('%
:7%5
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
445 6 6
+2
9
"7! 5
*9
1/"7" 5
,*."9
7%5
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
+2
%5
"71! 5
"7!
*17"" 5
**7"
4
:%5
4
(
(494
;4594
%
445 6 6
8;9
+4=
" 0!<
%9* >4?#
%90 3?#
%9! %9*4%9/#
%91 (3#
%9/ 3#
Figure 2-28 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) SetpointRanges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(67N) Residual Directional Overcurrent
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–41
Application - 2
78 Out-of-StepThe Out-of-Step function (78) is used to protect thegenerator from out-of-step or pole slip conditions.Out-of-Step conditions can occur when faults arebeing cleared on the distribution system, and the DGaccelerates as mechanical input exceeds electricaldemand and synchronizing power is lost. This functionuses one set of blinders, along with a supervisoryMHO element. Ranges and increments are presentedin Figure 2-30.
The pickup area is restricted to the shaded area inFigure 2-29, Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics,defined by the inner region of the MHO circle, theregion to the right of the blinder A and the region tothe left of blinder B. For operation of the blinderscheme, the operating point (positive sequenceimpedance) must originate outside either blinder A orB, and swing through the pickup area for a timegreater than or equal to the time delay setting andprogress to the opposite blinder from where theswing had originated. When this scenario happens,the tripping logic is complete. The output contact willremain closed for the amount of time set by the seal-in timer delay.
Consider, for example, Figure 2-29. If the out-of-stepswing progresses to impedance Z
0(t
0), the MHO
element and the blinder A element will both pick up.As the swing proceeds and crosses blinder B atZ
1(t
1), blinder B will pick up. When the swing reaches
Z2(t
2), blinder A will drop out. If TRIP ON MHO EXIT
option is disabled and the timer has expired(t
2–t
1>time delay), then the trip logic is complete. If
the TRIP ON MHO EXIT option is enabled and thetimer has expired, then for the trip to occur the swingmust progress and cross the MHO circle at Z
3(t
3)
where the MHO element drops out. Note the timer isactive only in the pickup region (shaded area). If theTRIP ON MHO EXIT option is enabled, a morefavorable tripping angle is achieved, which reducesthe breaker tripping duty. The relay can also be setwith a Pole Slip Counter. The relay will operate whenthe number of pole slips are greater than the setting,provided the Pole Slip Reset Time was not expired.Typically, the Pole Slip Counter is set to 1, in whichcase the Pole Slip Reset Time is not applicable.
>0 0#
>1 1#
>* *#
>" "#
Figure 2-29 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics
2–42
M-3520 Instruction Book
78 DIAMETER________ Ohms
78 OFFSET________ Ohms
78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE________ Ohms
78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees
78 DELAY________ Cycles
78 TRIP ON MHO EXITdisable enable
78 POLE SLIP COUNT________ slips
78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME________ Cycles
A negative or positive offset can be specified to offsetthe mho circle from the origin.
The blinder impedance should be programmed lessthan the set diameter.
454
&::
+%5
5 3
45
9
+4
-,#$&'%&%+
%48@&; 6 6
"7*&A5
$*""7"&A5
*9
"34
"7*
*9
*
*""7"&A5
*""7"&A5
,*."9
<"34
!"7"
,*."9
1"
)*
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 * . ! / 0 1 *
23
Figure 2-30 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges
2–43
Application - 2
79 Reconnect Enable Time DelayThe reconnect relay is a permissive programmableoutput that may be set to close from 1 to 8160cycles after all tripping functions are within limits.The 79 function is unique in that it is not considereda tripping function, and therefore if Output #8 isselected, it does not trigger target storage by default.The 79 function is enabled, and its output selectedthrough the Relay Setpoints Screen, just as otherfunctions. In addition to the time delay setting, thereconnect function monitors all functions that areprogrammed to trip. The reconnect relay will initiatetiming when all outputs defined as trip outputs arenot in a trip condition.
For example: If function 27#1 is programmed tooutput 5 (for alarm), 27#2 to output 1 (for trip), 81#1to output 6 (for alarm), 81#2 to output 2 (for trip),59G to output 2 (for trip), and 79 to output 8 (forreconnect), then OUT1 and OUT2 should beselected as output initiate. Schematic representationof this example is shown below:
OUT5 (alarm)TD27#1
OUT1 (trip)TD27#2
OUT6 (alarm)TD81#1
OUT2 (trip)
TD81#2
TD59G
OUT8(reconnect)
TDAND
OR
Figure 2-31 79 Function Logic Diagram
2–44
M-3520 Instruction Book
79 RECN INITIATE (TRIP)o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 O2 o1
79 DELAY________ Cycles
Designated trip output selection. All trip outputs must dropout to start reconnect timer.
Reconnect time delay.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
-<#$&% %8 B
9 19 .!!""9 )*
&'%+'%, - . ! / 0 1 *
. ! / 0 1 *
23
. ! / 0 1 *
Figure 2-32 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Reconnect Enable Time Delay (79) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(79) Reconnect Enable Time Delay
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–45
Application - 2
81 #3 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #3 DELAY________ Cycles
81 #4 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #4 DELAY________ Cycles
81 FrequencyWhen Dispersed Generation (DG) is suddenlyislanded, the frequency will quickly shift from 60.0 Hz(except for the improbable case of an exactgeneration and load match), making themeasurement of frequency an excellent means todetect the island condition. If the only purpose is todetect the island condition, the frequency relay 81Uand 81O can be set to operate at 59.5 Hz and 60.5Hz, respectively (on a 60 Hz system), with a timedelay of about 10 cycles.
A second school of thought advocates that the DGshould definitely not be severed from the utility lowfrequency operation while the frequency remainsas high as 59.5 Hz. This concept follows from thepremise that if the drop in frequency is due to amajor loss of system generation, it is at just thistime that all available DG should be kept on-line tohelp prevent a complete system collapse. If this isthe objective, it may be useful to set oneunderfrequency characteristic at 57.5 to 58.0 Hzwith a very short time delay, but allowing a higherfrequency, say 59.5 Hz, to be maintained for severalseconds.
61.0
60.8
60.6
60.4
60.2
60.0
59.8
59.6
59.4
59.2
59.0
Time (cycles)
81O
ver
Fre
qu
ency
(H
z)81
Un
der
Fre
qu
ency
(H
z)
Trip
Trip
Over FrequencyTime Delay #2
Over FrequencyTime Delay #1
Under FrequencyTime Delay #4
Under FrequencyTime Delay #3
Over FrequencyMagnitude #1
Under FrequencyMagnitude #4
Over FrequencyMagnitude #2
Under FrequencyMagnitude #3
Figure 2-33 Typical Settings of 81 Function
81 #1 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
81 #2 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #2 DELAY________ cycles
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–46
M-3520 Instruction Book
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(81) - FREQUENCY
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
2 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
2 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
2 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
2 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Save
Cancel
Figure 2-34 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(81) Frequency
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
2–47
Application - 2
81R #2 PICKUP________ Hz/s
81R #2 DELAY________ Cycles
81R NEG SEQ VOLT INHIBIT25%
81R Rate of Change of FrequencyThe Rate of Change of Frequency function can beused to detect islanding conditions. When the DG(Dispersed Generation) is islanded, the frequencyeither increases or decreases rapidly, dependingupon the generator-load mismatch. If set far fromNominal Frequency, it may be difficult for over/underfrequency relay functions to detect islanding.The Rate of Change of Frequency function providesproper detection of islanding conditions under thesecircumstances.
81R #1 PICKUP________ Hz/s
81R #1 DELAY________ Cycles
The function also has an automatic disable feature,to disable 81R function during unbalanced faultsand other system disturbances. This feature usesnegative sequence voltage to block 81R function.When the measured negative sequence voltageexceeds the inhibit setting, the function 81R isblocked. The time delay and magnitude settings of81R should be based on simulation studies, andthe setpoint ranges are given in Figure 2-35 below.
Save
Cancel
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(81R) - RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY
Pickup:
Delay:
0.10 Hz/S
1 Cycle
20.0 Hz/S
8160 Cycles
#1
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Pickup:
Delay:
0.10 Hz/S
1 Cycle
20.0 Hz/S
8160 Cycles
#2
OUTPUT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Input@
Inhibit: 0% 99%
Figure 2-35 M-3822 IPScom® for Windows™ Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges
Path: Relay Menu/Setup/Setpoints/(81R) Rate of Change of Frequency
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves all information to the relay.
Cancel Returns the user to the previous window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
2–48
M-3520 Instruction Book
2.5 Oscillograph Recorder
The oscillograph recorder provides comprehensivedata recording of all monitored waveforms (voltage,current, control/status inputs and output contacts) at16 samples per cycle. Oscillograph data can bedownloaded using the communications ports to anyIBM compatible PC running M-3822 IPScom®
communications software. Once downloaded, thewaveforms can be examined using M-3801D IPSplot®
PLUS Oscillograph data analysis software.
The recorder can be triggered manually through serialcommunications using IPScom or automatically usingprogrammed control/status inputs (IN1–6) orprogrammed output contact (OUT1–8) operation.When untriggered, the recorder continually recordswaveform data, keeping the most recent data inmemory. The recorders memory may be partitionedinto any one of the following:
• one 170 cycle record
• two 112 cycle records
• three 84 cycle records
• four 68 cycle records
When configured with a specific post trigger delay,the oscillographic record will show post-trip data inaddition to pre-trip data, and keeps a snapshot ofwaveform data in its memory for downloading usingIPScom.
NOTE: If more events or triggers occur beforedownloading than the number ofpartitions being used, the oldest recordwill be overwritten. Records are notretained if power to the relay isinterrupted.
A post trigger delay of 5% to 95% may be specified.After triggering, the recorder will continue to storedata for the programmed portion of the total recordbefore rearming for the next record. For example, asetting of 80% will result in a record with 20% pre-trigger and 80% post trigger data.
The OSC TRIG LED on the front panel will indicatewhen oscillograph data has been recorded and isavailable for download.
RECORDER PARTITIONS4
TRIGGER INPUTSI6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
TRIGGER OUTPUTSo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
POST TRIGGER DELAY5%
“Recorder Partitions” designates the number of parti-tions that the oscillograph recorder will use. Wheneverthis number is changed, the post-trigger delay is auto-matically reset to 5%
The trigger inputs designate the control/status inputswhose operation will trigger the recorder to record anevent. Operation is “OR”ed if more than one input isselected.
The trigger outputs are relay output contacts whoseoperation will trigger the recorder to record an event.Operation is “OR”ed if more than one output is selected.
The post trigger delay assigns the amount, in percent, ofthe individual data record occurring after the trigger. Theremaining portion consists of pre-trigger data.
The setup of the Oscillograph Recorder includes the following settings:
2–49
Application - 2
2.7 IRIG-B Time Sync
The M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay has the abilityto accept either a modulated or demodulated IRIG-Bsignal. The modulated signal is connected using therear panel BNC connector, and is the defaultconfiguration.
A demodulated TTL level signal may also be usedby connecting the signal source to two unused pinson the rear panel COM2 RS-232 connector (seetable B-1). For demodulated operation, severaljumpers need to be reconfigured (see Section 5.5,Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).
When valid IRIG-B time information is received, theTIME SYNC LED is illuminated, and the hour,minute, and seconds of the on-board real-time clock(RTC) are corrected to the new IRIG-B time at five(5) minutes before the hour. Extended timeinformation, accurate to 1 ms, is appended to alloscillograph and target time tags.
2.6 Target History Recorder
Designated tripping output. In this sample, O1–O7are trip outputs, and o8 is used for reconnect.
The 32 most recent target events are stored in theunit’s memory. A target is triggered whenever anoutput (designated as a trip output) operates.
The setup of the Target History Recorder includes the following setting:
TRIGGER OUTPUTSo8 O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1
Operation (Front Panel) – 3
3–1
3 Operation (Front Panel)
3.1 Front Panel Controls .................................................................. 3–1
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ................................................ 3–6
3.3 Checkout Status/Metering ........................................................ 3–11
This chapter provides information on the operationof the optional M-3931 Human-Machine InterfaceModule (HMI) front panel controls to maneuverthrough the menus, enter values, set andinterrogate the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay.
3.1 Front Panel Controls
The relay has been designed to be set andinterrogated locally with the optional M-3931 HMI.An integral part of this design is the layout andfunction of the front panel indicators and controls;see Figure 3-1, Front Panel.
The indicators and controls consist of a 2 x 24-character display, and a 6-button keypad. Thesecontrols are used by the operator to navigate thesystem menus, and to set and interrogate the unit.Detailed information on using these controls isprovided in this chapter.
Alphanumeric DisplayTo assist the operator in setting and interrogatingthe relay, the display shows menus, which guidethe operator to the desired function or setpointvalue. These menus consist of two lines. Thebottom line shows lower case abbreviations ofeach menu selection with the current menuselected and highlighted in uppercase. The topmenu line provides a description of the currentmenu selection (see Figures 3-2 and 3-3).
While the unit is not in use, and has not operated,the user logo lines are blanked. If the unit hasoperated, the display cycles through a sequence ofscreens summarizing the operation status conditions(targets) until ENTER is pressed, at which time thefirst-level menu is displayed.
Screen BlankingThe display will automatically blank after exitingfrom the Main Menu, or from any screen after five(5) minutes of unattended operation. To wake upthe display, the user must press any key exceptEXIT.
M-3520 Instruction Book
3–2
Arrow ButtonsThe left and right arrow buttons are used to chooseamong menu selections shown on the display. Whenentering values, these buttons are used to selectthe digit (by moving the cursor) of the displayedsetpoint that will be increased or decreased by theuse of the up and down arrow buttons.
The up and down arrow buttons only increase ordecrease input values, or change between upperand lower case inputs. Upper case inputs areactive whereas lower case inputs are inactive. Ifthe up or down arrow button is held in whenadjusting numerical values, the speed of theincrement or decrement is increased, after a smalldelay.
EXIT ButtonUse the EXIT button to exit from a displayed screento the immediately preceding menu. Any changedsetpoint will not be saved if the selection is abortedvia the EXIT button.
ENTER ButtonThe ENTER button is used to choose a highlightedmenu selection, to replace a setpoint or otherprogrammable value with the currently displayedvalue, or to select one of several displayed options,such as to ENABLE or DISABLE a function.
Target/Status Indicators and ControlsThe target/status indicators and controls consist ofthe following LEDs: Power Supply (PSI and PS2)RELAY OK, the Oscillograph Recorder (OSCTRIG), BREAKER CLOSED, TARGET ,DIAGNOSTIC and TIME SYNC
Power Supply (PS1 and PS2) LED.The green power LED indicator(s) remainsilluminated for the appropriate power supplywhenever power is applied to the unit. Power supplyPS2 is available as an option.
Relay OK LEDThe green RELAY OK LED is controlled by therelay's microprocessor. A flashing OK LEDindicates proper program cycling. The LED canalso be programmed to illuminate continuously, ifdesired.
Oscillograph (OSC TRIG) Recorder LEDThe OSC TRIG LED illuminates to indicate thatoscillograph data has been recorded in the unit’smemory.
Breaker (BRKR) CLOSED LEDThe red BRKR CLOSED LED illuminates whenthe breaker status input (52b) is open.
Target Indicators and Target ResetNormally, the 24 TARGET LEDs are notilluminated. Upon operation, LEDs correspondingto the cause(s) of the operation will light and stayilluminated until reset. The eight OUTPUT LED’swill reflect the present state of the OUT1–OUT8output contacts. Pressing and releasing theTARGET RESET button will momentarily light allLEDs (providing a means to test them) and allowsresetting of the TARGET LEDs if the conditioncausing the operation has been removed. Detailedinformation about the cause of the last 32operations is retained in the unit’s memory foraccess through the alphanumeric display via theVIEW TARGET HISTORY menu.
Pressing and holding the TARGET RESET buttondisplays the present pickup status of the M-3520functions on the target indicators.
Time Sync LEDThe green TIME SYNC LED illuminates to indicatethat the IRIG-B time signal is being received andvalidated.
Diagnostic LED (DIAG LED)The diagnostic LED flashes upon occurrence of adetectable self-test error. The LED will flash theError Code Number. For example, for error code32, the LED will flash 3 times, followed by a shortpause, and then 2 flashes, followed by a longpause, and then repeat. For units equipped withthe HMI, the Error Code Number is also displayedon the screen.
Accessing ScreensTo prevent unauthorized access to functions, thesoftware allows assignment of access codes. Ifaccess codes have been assigned, the accesscode entry screen will be displayed after ENTERis pressed from the default message screen.
NOTE: The relay is shipped with the accesscode feature disabled.
Operation (Front Panel) – 3
3–3
The M-3520 has three levels of access codes,which determine the extent of access to M-3520functions for each user. The higher the Levelnumber, the greater access permitted.
Level 1 access - provides access to read setpoints,monitor status and view target history.
Level 2 access - provides all level 1 access, plusthe ability to change setpoints.
Level 3 access - provides all level 1 & 2 access,plus the ability to change configuration parameters.
Each access code is a user defined 1 to 4 digitnumber. If the level 3 access code is set to 9999,the access code feature is disabled. When accesscodes are disabled, the access screens arebypassed. Access codes are altered by choosingthe ALTER ACCESS CODES menu under SETUPUNIT menu. (These codes can only be altered bya level 3 user).
Default Message ScreensWhen the M-3520 is powered and unattended,user logo lines are blanked.
If a function has operated and not been reset, it willdisplay the time and date of the operation andautomatically cycle through screens for eachapplicable target. (This sequence is illustrated inFigure 3-2.) In either case, pressing ENTER willbegin local mode operation, thereby displaying theaccess code entry screen, or if access codes aredisabled, the first level menu will be displayed.
Serial Interfaces (COM1, COM2 and COM3)The serial interface COM1 port (front) and COM2port (rear) are standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE configuredcommunications ports.
The COM1 port will normally be used for localsetting and interrogating of the relay via a portablecomputer running IPScom®. IPScom only supportscommunications using BECO 2200 protocol. COM1port protocol is fixed at BECO 2200. An additionalCOM3 port (RS-485) is available at the rear terminalblock. Either the COM2 port or the COM3 port willnormally be used for remote setting andinterrogation of the relay via a network, directconnection or permanently wired modem.
COM2 and COM3 have the option of setting theprotocol to BECO2200 or MODBUS. COM1 com-municates at a fixed 8 bits, no parity and 2 stopbits (8,N, 2 standard BECO 2200 settings). How-ever, COM2 and COM3 have the option of set-
ting parity (none, odd or even) and stop bit (1,2), if configured for MODBUS protocol. Detailedinformation on the use of the communicationsports is provided in Appendix B, Communica-tions.
The protocol description document and thecommunication data base document may berequested from the factory or from Beckwith’s website at www.beckwithelectric.com.
Communication SpecificationsThe following descriptions apply for use ofMODBUS protocol:
1. MODBUS protocol is not supported onCOM1.
2. Parity is supported on COM2 andCOM3; valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1;8,E,1; 8,N,1; 8,O,2; or 8,E,2.
3. ASCII mode is not supported (RTUonly).
4. Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600are supported.
5. Only the following MODBUS commandsare supported:a. Read holding register (Function 03).b. Read input register (function 04)c. Force single coil (function 05)d. Preset single register (function 06).
6. MODBUS does not support oscillographrecord downloading.
M-3520 Instruction Book
3–4
Figure 3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow
M-3931
Human-Machine InterfaceModule
–Optional–
M-3915
Target Module–Optional–
Figure 3-1 M-3520 Front Panel
!*
267!89!%% %
%!%$
*!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
$
+ *!
%
+ *!
5-minuteaccesslockout
!"#$%&'(
#$%)&'(*)+
!",-#./0&#-12
'//%%/(
-//%%'(3
//%%('.(3
456!7/08.$/.//9
1:-:;1-<-;<-!=>'%?/&'
,="1:-:;1-<-;<-!
Blanked Screen
LED Test
@@@@@@@@#8'%A%%
#%%#8'%A%%
%.'&47@@@
-:-:;1-6<!=<5!
Self-Tests
456!7 B*2
7 B*2 /9
7 B*2 /9
7 B*2 /9
Software Version
Serial Number
System Date and Time
Model Number
D - 0060vxx-xx-xx
456!7 B*2 /9
Default Logo
Operation (Front Panel) – 3
3–5
!"#$ %&"#
C 1-+A'43C !<+A&43C 1-4'43C !<4&43C /-3?&43C !<+2&43
C !"&444C !*(%5&444C !"&444C !*%5&444C /.3?&444C .-4&444C .-4&444C 445
C ,*4?9C ,*:A34?
C 1*+AC -,&:
C ."(7%7 C 1!9A2
' '
() ##*+
C -<
+",#*#
C(3C44C4?9C+D4C5C9A2CE&C(3%54C44%54C4?9%54C+D4%54C%54C9A2%54C%54C%54C4C%5:+D4'C444CA25
C(D%43@49C4%43@49C%43
C(D4C44C44
C&8*C&81C&80C55 4C55
----#."
/) #0
C:D4(4C4564C 4 C'44564C'43*C'431C4&4C4 454CF%5C4444C38
()& ,# 0
(11 (."
2-11#2
C 014+D4
(/ (/
33 0 !"# #*+
)4!"##
#*##&
C(39C449C4?99C+D49C+A9C(7%79C9A29C9
( -+", #&
C 5(3C 544C (7%7:34C 9$A2+AC +AC +9C 9$%5C C $B%4:45C (7%7+AC (7%7(1C (7%74C 7%7+AC 7%74
Figure 3-3 Main Menu Flow
M-3520 Instruction Book
3–6
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings
The relay is shipped with the initial configurationsettings as listed in Appendix A, and recorded inthe Record forms. Selected settings that are uniqueto the application may be recorded on theappropriate record form as calculated from Chapter2, Application.
Setup Procedure1. Connect power to the relay's rear power
terminals, as marked on the rear panel’spower supply label and as shown inFigure 5-4, External Connections.
2. Whenever initially powered up, the relayperforms a number of self-tests toensure its proper operation. During theself-tests, the display shows an “X” foreach test successfully executed. If alltests are successful, the unit will brieflydisplay the word PASS. Then it will cyclethrough a series of status screens,including the model number, softwareversion number, serial number, date andtime as set in the system clock, and theuser logo screen will be displayed.(Figure 3-2 illustrates this sequence ofscreens.)
3. If any test should fail, the error LED willflash, an error code will be displayedand the relay will not allow operation toproceed. In such a case, the error codeshould be noted and Beckwith Electriccontacted. A list of error codes and theirdescriptions are provided in AppendixC, Error Codes. Assuming that variousvoltage functions are enabled, and thereare no voltage inputs connected, variousvoltage targets will be identified ashaving operated
4. If remote communication is used, thebaud rate, address, and otherparameters for the communication portsmust be set. Refer to the instructions insubsection Communications Data(located at end of this procedure). Alsorefer to Chapter 4, Operation(Computer), on M-3822 IPScom®.
5. To setup the unit with generalinformation required, including alteringaccess codes, clearing output counters,setting date and time, installing userlogos, and other adjustments, refer toSetup Unit Data, in this section.
6. If desired, calibrate the unit following thecalibration procedure described insubsection 6.3, Auto Calibration. Forunits without HMI, refer to Section 5.5,Circuit Board Switches & Jumpers.
NOTE: The relay has been fully calibrated atthe factory using very precise andaccurate test equipment. There is noneed for recalibration before initialinstallation. Further calibration is onlynecessary if a component was changedand will be only as accurate as the testequipment used.
7. Finish relay configuration in the SETUPSYSTEM menu. This is the generalsystem and equipment informationrequired for relay operation. See Figure3-4, Setup System Menu. This includessuch items as CT and VT ratios, VTconfigurations, and Nominal values.
8. Enable the desired functions under theCONFIGURE RELAY menu.
NOTE: Disabling unused functions improvesthe response time of the indicators andcontrols.
9. Enter the desired setpoints for theenabled functions.
10. Enter the desired information for theoscillograph recorder.
11. Enter the desired information for thetarget recorder.
12. Install the relay and connect externalinput and output contacts according tothe rear panel terminal block markingsas shown in Figure 5-4, ExternalConnections.
Operation (Front Panel) – 3
3–7
99!.+)!+) )
99'&.++)+!)' )
%&#% %4 % %
'4.'-!2
'4.' + *
'4.'/&'69
'4.'/&'+2/&+ *
99/'A.&.'+2 *
99/'A.&.'.'.'2
99/'A.&.'2))22
% '//$/0#$%+2 +% '/*
% '//$/0#$%CC
99#$%.-9<-
99!#$%.-9<-
99'&.-9<-
/99#$%.++)+!+)/ )
/99#$%.-<-
/99'&.++)+!+) /)'
/99'&.-<-
99#$%.+)+!+) )
/..'#&%22.')
/..'#&#': 2>6=5!-
#$%.'+2 + #$%
#$%.' C7/
#&% #&%2)
#&% 1">6=5!-
%.'.42%)
%.'.4&-5/ 2
%.'.4&!5/ 2
%.'.4&55/ 2
%.'.4&=5/ 2
%.'.4&65/ 2
%.'.4&>5/ 2
%.'.4&"5/ 2
%.'.4&15/ 2
( '%A422( @
( '%A4(.%7 C2
Figure 3-4 Setup System Menu
M-3520 Instruction Book
3–8
Communication DataThe general information that is required to completethe input data of this section includes:
• Baud rate for COM1 and COM2communication ports. COM3 uses thesame baud rate as COM2 (default) orCOM1 (jumper selectable).
• Communications address used to accessmultiple relays via a multidropcommunication line.
• Communications access code (used forcommunication system security; enteringan access code of 9999 disables thecommunication security feature).
• Communication protocol and dead synctime for COM2 and COM3.
• Parity for COM2 and COM3 if MODBUSprotocol is used.
Before entering the communication data, theCommunication Data & Unit Setup Record (seeAppendix A, Form A-1) should be completed.
Figure 3-5 is a sample of the Communication Data& Unit Setup Record Form. Refer to the column onthe left for communication data. It is organized inthe same order as in the relay menu.
The values shown in the Communication Datacolumn of Figure 3-5 represent the default or “asshipped” values for these setpoints.Communication data for units purchased withoutthe M-3931 HMI module may be altered by usingthe IPSutil™ utility package which is shipped withthe IPScom® software package. Establishingcommunication with the relay using the defaultparameters is required before other setpoints maybe altered.
Setup Unit DataThe general information that is required to completethe input data in this section includes:
• Access codes
• Control numbers
• Date and time
• User logo
• Diagnostic mode
Before entering the setup data, the CommunicationData & Unit Setup Record (see Appendix A, FormA-1) should be completed.
Figure 3-5 is a sample of the Communication Data& Unit Setup Record Form. Refer to the twocolumns on the right for setup data.
The relay already contains factory settings for setupdata, which can be used to familiarize the userwith the SETUP UNIT menu.
Setup SystemInformation required in this section includes:
• Nominal Voltage and Current
• VT Configuration
• Sync-Check Phase
• Phase Rotation
• Pulse Relay
• Relay Seal-in Time
• Active Input State
• Delta-Y Transform
• VT Phase, Neutral and V2 Ratios
• CT Phase and Neutral Ratios
See Figure 3-4 for Sample Settings related toinput for this Section. Settings are self explanatory,and are required for proper operation of the M-3520relay.
Configure Relay DataThe relay is shipped with a certain group ofstandard functions (along with any purchasedoptional functions).Both standard and optionalfunctions are fully configurable. (Unpurchasedfunctions cannot be enabled.)
Functions designated as DISABLED are inactiveand will not be available for tripping. All menusassociated with inactive functions will beunavailable.
The general information required to complete theinput data on this section includes:
• Enable/disable function
• Output choices (OUT1–8)
• Input blocking choices (IN1–6 and/or fuseloss)
Operation (Front Panel) – 3
3–9
('(.4-
/44&'./.'/44
/4-7&(C)=17&();>
/4-%&#/4- ! 5 )
/4!7&(C)=17&();>
/4!%&# -/4! 5 )
('(.4-D'!--<-<1
('(.4D'C
('(.4.4
&%/''&47+ '&47
&%/''&47-/44&'./.'((%%
- ! 5/4)(
/44&'./.'((%%-
/44&'./.'//%%/(//%%
/44&'./.'//%%/(;;;;
/4!((% '/.46
/4!#/7/!!C
/45%&# - !/45 )
/457&(C)=17&();>
/45((% '/.46
/45#/7/!!C
%&#&'. %&#
%A8%.'(>-9!9"
%A8%.'% C
%.'&47+%' C
%.'&47-
,5;;;;
,!!!!!
,-----
'//%%/(-2+2!2+25
//%%/(%+//%%C
/&#&/&'%2-2!&2
/&#&/&'%#%%'0 /
/4/&'%2-2!4
/4/&'%#%%'0 /
&%.'!2-!2
&%.'!456!
&%.'--2!2
&%.'-7/08.$/.//9
('(.4-(
('(.4%&'*
('(.4-4
('(.4-$
('(.4!%
(.'%./4((.
#/%%8.%3'0 /'.'&
//(%
//(%#%%'0 /
Figure 3-5 Communication Data & Unit Setup Menu
M-3520 Instruction Book
3–10
Setpoints and Time SettingsThe general information that is required to completethe input data in this section includes individualrelay function:
• Pickup settings (converted to relayquantities)
• Time delay settings
• Time dials and curves
• Power in PU, etc.
Input descriptions are detailed in Section 2.4,Setpoints and Time Settings. Make sure tocomplete the Setpoint & Timing Record Form inAppendix A before entering the setpoint and timesetting data.
The relay already contains factory settings forsetpoint and time setting data, which can be usedto familiarize you with these menus.
Oscillograph Recorder DataThe oscillograph recorder provides comprehensivedata recording of all monitored waveforms, storingup to 170 cycles of data. The total record length isprogrammable for one (170 cycles), two (112cycles), three (84 cycles each), or four (68 cycles)event records. The oscillograph recorder istriggered either remotely, via designated statusinput signals or through relay output operations.
When untriggered, the recorder continuouslyrecords waveform data, keeping the data in buffermemory. When triggered, the recorder continuesstoring data for a period of time, as defined by theuser, thereby keeping the most recent records inmemory for downloading to a personal computer.
If more events or triggers occur than the numberof records (partitions) designated beforedownloading of data, triggering the recorderoverwrites the oldest of the event records. Be sureto complete the Setpoint & Timing Record Form inAppendix A before entering the oscillographrecorder settings.
The relay already contains factory settings foroscillograph recorder setup, which can be used tofamiliarize the user with the OSCILLOGRAPHRECORDER menu.
The HMI module allows the user to view timestamps for recorded events, and to clear all recordsin order to provide a fresh starting point for eventtriggering.
Target History RecorderThe VIEW TARGET HISTORY menu selectionenables the user to review the targets for theprevious 32 target conditions. A target is triggeredwhenever a designated output is operated orclosed. The target history for each operation cyclescontinuously through a sequence of screens untilEXIT is pressed. A target includes:
• pickup information which indicates anyfunction which is timing,
• an indication whose function or functionshave operated and timers expired,
• phase and ground currents at the time oftrip, and individual phase elementinformation at the time of the trigger, ifthe operating function was a 3-phasefunction,
• input and output status, and
• a time tag of the trigger.
The time tag of the trigger will be in the followingformat:
HH(Hours); MM(min); SS.xxx(seconds).
The xxx will be 000 if the IRIG-B signal is notconnected or not synched. Otherwise, it will giveseconds to the nearest thousands of a second.
CLEAR TARGET allows the user to clear alloperation history for further target recording.
TARGET SETUP allows the user to select whichoutputs will trigger a target record. In most casesonly tripping function outputs will be programmedto trigger targets. Outputs designated for reconnector sync-check are usually not included in this set.
NOTE: If a second function is used in an attemptto operate an output that has alreadyoperated, it will not trigger a new targetsince no new output has been operatedor closed. If the second functionoperation closes a different unoperatedoutput, a new target will be triggered.Targets are captured or recorded onlywhen an output operates.
Operation (Front Panel) – 3
3–11
3.3 Checkout Status/Metering
The relay has two menu selections concerningmonitoring status and demand values. This sectiondescribes the operation of these selections.
Status/MeteringAccess the STATUS menu as follows:
1. Press ENTER to bring up the mainmenu.
2. Press the right arrow button untilSTATUS appears on the top line of thedisplay.
3. Press ENTER to access the STATUSsubmenu and begin the monitoring.
NOTE: Each category listed below is asubmenu item. Pressing the ENTERbutton moves the item down within thatmenu, allowing monitoring of valueswithin that submenu category. To exit aspecific category and continue to thenext menu category, press the EXITbutton.
All metering values in this section (with theexception of power metering) are secondary levelquantities.
The menu categories for monitored values are:
VOLTAGE STATUSPhase voltages, neutral voltage, V2 voltage,positive sequence voltage, negative sequencevoltage, zero sequence voltage
CURRENT STATUS
Phase currents, neutral current, positive sequencecurrent, negative sequence current, zero sequencecurrent
FREQUENCY STATUS
Frequency, Rate of change of frequency
POWER STATUS
Real power, Reactive power, Apparent power,Power factor
IMPEDANCE STATUS
SYNC CHECK STATUS
IN/OUT STATUS
Status of input and output contacts
The following timer status can also be monitored:
VOLTAGE TIMER
27, 27G, 47, 59, 59I, 59G
CURRENT TIMER
46, 50, 50G, 51G, 51V, 67
FREQUENCY TIMER81, 81R
POWER TIMER
32
DISTANCE TIMER
21
SYNC CHECK TIMER25
FUSE LOSS TIMER
60FL
RECONNECT TIMER
79
Timers for the inverse time functions are displayedin percentage where 100% corresponds to the fullvalue of the integrating timer.
If the associated function time setting is less than2 cycles, the indicated status will be less thanactual. The following miscellaneous status canalso be monitored:
COUNTERS OUT1–8 plus alarm
TIME OF LAST POWER UP
ERROR CODES Last error code log
1
3
A
B
C
4–1
Operation (Computer) – 4
4 Operation (Computer)
4.1 Installation and Setup (M-3822 IPScom®) ................................ 4–1
4.2 Operation .................................................................................... 4–4
4.3 Cautions .................................................................................... 4–14
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering (Windows) ..................................... 4–15
4.5 Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................. 4–18
4.6 IPSutil™ Communications Software ........................................ 4–19
This chapter contains information on configuringand interrogating the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relayusing a personal computer running the M-3822IPScom Communications Software package.
4.1 Installation and Setup
The IPScom Communications Software packageruns under Microsoft® Windows 95 operating system,or later. This version of IPScom only supportscommunication using the BECO 2200 protocol.
IPScom is available on the following media (IBMPC-compatible format):
• CD-ROM
• Available for download from our websiteat www.beckwithelectric.com
The M-3822 IPScom software is not copy-protectedand can be copied to a hard disk. For moreinformation on your specific rights andresponsibilities regarding the M-3822 IPScomsoftware, refer to the licensing agreement enclosedwith your software, or contact Beckwith Electric Co.
Hardware RequirementsIPScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible computerthat provides at least the following:
• 8 Mb of RAM
• Microsoft Windows 95 or later
• CD-ROM
• One serial (RS-232) communication port
The M-3520 is provided with three serialcommunication ports. Two serial interface ports,COM1 and COM2 are standard 9-pin RS-232DTE-configured ports. The front panel port, COM1,can be used as a temporary connection to locallyset and interrogate the relay by computer. Thesecond RS-232 COM2 port is provided at the rear ofthe unit.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–2
An RS-485 configured port, COM3 is located at therear terminal block of the unit. Either COM2 orCOM3 can be used to remotely set and interrogatethe relay using a modem, whereas all three portsmay be used for direct serial connection.
NOTE: The RS-232 standard specifies amaximum cable length of 50 feet forRS-232 connections. Successfuloperation cannot be guaranteed for cablelengths exceeding this recommendation.Every effort should be made to keepcabling as short as possible. Lowcapacitance cable is recommended.
Use of IPScom® and M-3520 Intertie ProtectionRelay using a ModemIn order to use IPScom to communicate with therelay using a modem, the following must be providedfor the unit.
• Hayes-compatible external modem; 1200,2400, 4800, or 9600 baud.
• Serial modem cable with 9-pin connectorfor the system and the applicableconnector for the modem.
Similarly, the computer running IPScom must alsohave access to a Hayes-compatible internal orexternal modem. Pin-outs for communication cablesare provided in Appendix B.
Use of IPScom and M-3520 Intertie ProtectionRelay using Direct Serial ConnectionIn order to use IPScom to communicate with therelay using direct serial connection, a serial “nullmodem” cable is required. The cable must beprovided with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) for thesystem, and an applicable connector for thecomputer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for anull modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,Communications. A 10-foot, null modem RS-232cable may be purchased from Beckwith ElectricCo. (part number M-0423).
InstallationBefore installing the IPScom program, make a copyof the software disks for archive purposes.
Figure 4-1 IPScom Program Icon
IPScom can be run from a hard disk. An installationutility (setup.exe) has been provided to make theprocess easier.
Installing IPScom1. Insert software CD-ROM in your drive.
2. Select Run from the Start Menu.
3. In the Run dialog box, initiate softwareinstallation by typing either or D:\Setupor other drive designation:\Setup,depending on the drive in which thesoftware is inserted.
4. The installation utility establishes aprogram folder (Becoware) andsubdirectory (IPScom). After installation,the IPScom program item icon (see Figure4-1) is located in Becoware. Theapplication files are located on drive C,in the new subdirectory IPScom(C:\\Becoware\\Ipscom).
Installing IPSutil™IPSutil is utility software used to program system-level parameters for units shipped without the M-3931HMI Module. The IPSutil.exe file is automaticallyinstalled in the Becoware folder, along with theIPScom files, and does not require separateinstallation.
Installing the ModemsUsing IPScom to interrogate, set or monitor therelay using a modem requires both a remote modemconnected at the relay location and a local modemconnected to the computer with IPScom installed.
The local modem can be initialized, using IPScom,by connecting the modem to the computer, andselecting the COMM menu in IPScom. SelectMODEM, enter the required information, and finallyselect INITIALIZE from the expandedCommunications dialog box. The following stepsoutline the initialized modem setup procedure.
1
3
A
B
C
4–3
Operation (Computer) – 4
The modem attached to the unit must have thefollowing AT command configuration:
E0 No Echo
Q1 Don’t return result code
&D3 On to OFF DTR, hang-up and reset
&S0 DSR always on
&C1 DCD ON when detected
S0=2 Answer on second ring
The following commands may also be required atthe modem:
&Q6 Constant DTE to DCE
N0 Answer only at specified speed
W Disable serial data rate adjust
\Q3 Bi-directional RTS/CTS relay
&B1 Fixed serial port rate
S37 Desired line connection speed
There are some variation in the AT commandssupported by manufacturers of Hayes-compatiblemodems. Refer to the hardware user documentationfor a list of supported AT commands and directionon issuing these commands.
Setting Up the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relayfor CommunicationThe initial setup of the relay for communicationmust be completed by the optional M-3931 HMIModule or using direct serial connection using thedefault “As Shipped” communication parameters.Refer to Communication Data and Unit Setup “ASSHIPPED” form located in Appendix A, Forms.
For units shipped without the optional HMI Module,the communication parameters may be altered byfirst establishing communication using the defaultparameters and the IPSutil™ program.
IPSutil is an auxiliary program shipped on the samedisk with the IPScom program. It is used exclusivelyfor altering communication and setup parameterson units shipped without the M-3931 HMI Module.
NOTE: Communication is inhibited while therelay is in local mode (being accessedusing the HMI). To ensure the M-3520 isavailable for remote communication,press ENTER at the EXIT LOCAL MODEmenu item, or press the EXIT key severaltimes to back out of the menu tree to thetop level screen.
1. Connecting the modem to the computer:
a. If the computer has an externalmodem, use a standardstraight-through RS-232 modemcable to connect the computer andmodem (M-3933). If the computerhas an internal modem, refer to themodem’s instruction book todetermine which communicationsport should be selected.
b. The Hayes-compatible modem mustbe attached to (if external) orassigned to (if internal) the sameserial port as assigned in IPScom®.While IPScom can use any of thefour serial ports (COM1 throughCOM4), most computers supportonly COM1 and COM2.
c. Connect the modem to the telephoneline and power up.
2. Connecting the Modem to the Relay:Setup of the modem attached to therelay may be slightly complicated. Itinvolves programming the parameters(using the AT command set), and storingthis profile in the modem’s nonvolatilememory.
After programming, the modem will powerup in the proper state for communicatingwith M-3520. Programming may beaccomplished by using “Hyperterminal”or other terminal software. Refer to yourmodem manual for further information.
NOTE: The relay does not issue or understandany modem commands. It will not adjustthe baud rate and should be considereda “dumb” peripheral. It communicateswith 1 start, 8 data, and 1 stop bit.
a. Connect the unit to an externalHayes-compatible modem byattaching a standard RS-232 modemcable to the appropriate serialcommunications port on both theunit and the modem.
b. Connect the modem to the telephoneline and power up.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–4
Multiple Systems SetupThe individual addressing capability of IPScom®
and the relay allows multiple systems to share adirect or modem connection when connected usinga communications-line splitter (see Figure 4-2). Onesuch device enables 2 to 6 units to share onecommunications line.
CAUTION: Units connected to a communicationsline splitter must have a unique communicationsaddress. If two or more units share the same address,corrupted communications will result.
Serial Multidrop Network SetupIndividual remote addressing also allows forcommunications through a serial multidrop network.Up to 32 relays can be connected using the same2-wire or optional 4-wire RS-485 communicationsline.
Appendix B, Figure B-2 illustrates a setup of RS-232Fiber Optic network, and Figure B-3 illustrates a2-wire and 4-wire RS-485 network.
Other communication methods are possible usingthe M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay. An ApplicationNote, “Serial Communication with Beckwith Electric’sIntegrated Protection System Relays” is availablefrom the factory, or from our website atwww.beckwithelectric.com.
Communications-Line Splitter
Up to six controlscan be used with a
communications-line splitter.Address 2
Address 4
Address 5
Address 6
Address 3Address 1
IBM-Compatible PC
Integrated ProtectionSystem
Null Modem Cable forDirect RS-232 Connection
Master Port
Figure 4-2 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter
M-3520
1
3
A
B
C
4–5
Operation (Computer) – 4
3. Choose the COMM menu selection.Complete the appropriate information onthe window for the relay to be addressed.
a. If communication is through amodem, choose the Modemcommand button to expand thecommunications dialog box. Choosethe desired relay location and chooseDial button. This action establishescontact and automatically opens thecommunication to the relay.
b. If computer is serially connectedthrough the front port, choose theOpen COM button. This actionestablishes communications.
4. Enter any valid IPScom command(s) asdesired.
5. To end communication whencommunicating by modem, choose theHang Up command button from theexpanded Communication dialog box. Toclose the communication channel whenconnected locally, choose the CloseCOM command button.
4.2 Operation
Activating CommunicationsAfter the relay has been set up, the modemsinitialized, and IPScom installed, communication isactivated as follows:
1. Choose the IPScom icon from theBecoware folder.
2. The IPScom splash screen is displayedbriefly, providing the software versionnumber and copyright information. Thisinformation is also available by choosingthe About... command from the Helpmenu.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–6
!"
84
%43
&34A
49
459
!"
D&777
777
+4
+44
; G/
%
443
A3A555949A5536;745A36;9AA4364494:245A449553:7
#
'3@
6777
+4::
#$%
:7;!<=<!897:!98&!679&8>87;
98&! 66;7::
732?!?@7
4
%4334
4
95
E%5+4549
49
+A
+A4345
9
&:
9
4@49
Figure 4-3 IPScom® Menu Selections
1
3
A
B
C
4–7
Operation (Computer) – 4
OverviewWhen IPScom is run, a menu and status bar isdisplayed (as shown below). This section describeseach IPScom menu selection and explains eachIPScom command in the same order as they aredisplayed in the software program. For detailedinformation on each dialog box field (function), referto Chapter 2, Application.
When starting IPScom, the initial menu choices arethe File menu or the Comm menu. The choicespecifies whether the operator desires to write to andata file or to communicate directly with the relay.
File Menu
D& 777+4+44; G1
The File menu enables the user to create a newdata file, open a previously created data file, close,print, and save the file. The IPScom® program canalso be exited through the File menu.
Since IPScom can be used with several Beckwithprotection systems in addition to the M-3520 IntertieProtection Relay, the format and contents of a filemust be established depending on which protectivesystem is being addressed. When not connected toone of the protection systems, using the Newcommand, a new file is established with the NewDevice Profile dialog box (see Figure 4-5). Choosingthe OK command button, allows the new data file tobe named by using the Save or SaveAs...commands.
NOTE: By choosing the New command, unitand setpoint configuration values arebased on factory settings specified forthe profiled protection system.
X !
M-3520
OK
!"
#$%!
Cancel
Figure 4-4 New Device Profile Dialog Box
Path:File menu / New command
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Saves the currently displayedinformation.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom mainwindow; any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.
The Save and Save As... commands allow re-saving a file or renaming a file, respectively. TheOpen command allows opening a previously createddata file. With an opened data file, use the Relay...Setup... menu items to access the setpoint windows.
If communication can be established with a relay, itis always safer to use the Read Data From Relaycommand (found under the Relay menu) to updatethe PC’s data file with the relay data. This file nowcontains the proper system type information,eliminating the need to set the information manually.
The Print and Printer Setup commands allow userto select printer options and print out all setpointdata from the data file or directly from the relay, if arelay is communicating with the PC. The Exitcommand quits the IPScom program.
Comm Menu
# !"
The Communication dialog box (see Figure 4-5)allows setup of the IPScom communication data tocoordinate with the relay and, by choosing theModem button, establishment of contact for remotelocations. When communicating by way of a fiberoptic loop network, echo cancelling is available bychecking the Echo Cancel box. This commandmasks the sender’s returned echo.
If communication is established through the modem,the Dial button should be pressed after the dialstring is selected. If necessary, the Initialize buttoncan be used to send the initialization string to themodem. If checked, the Bring Up TerminalWindow After Dialing box provides an advanced
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–8
control on modem communications, such ascommunications where modem switch is involvedat the remote site.
If the modem was not used to establishcommunication, press the Open COM button tostart. If the relay has been defaulted with thecommunication access code 9999, a message
window will appear showing access level #3 wasgranted. Otherwise, another dialog box will appearto prompt the user to enter the access code in orderto establish the communication. Close COMdiscontinues communication.
##
&$
!
' '(
)(*
+,
"- -. "
%% %%/
!
,
++,
%+,
,
#$0
&
1
2
1 "
3
X
Figure 4-5 Communication Dialog Box
Path: Comm menu
COMMAND BUTTONS
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
Open COM Initiates contact with the protective system, either by direct serial or modem communication.
Close COM Breaks communication with the protective system, for both direct serial or modem communication.
Modem Displays the expanded Communication dialog box.
Add Displays the Add/Edit dialog box, allowing you to type a protective system’s unit identifier, phonenumber, and communication address.
Edit Displays the Add/Edit dialog box, allowing you to review and change the user lines (unit identifier),phone number, and communication address of a selected entry.
Delete Deletes a selected entry.
Initialize Allows you to send special setup or other AT commands directly to the modem.
Dial Dials the entry selected from the directory.
Hang Up Ends modem communication, allowing you to dial again.
Bring up A built-in terminal window allows anTerminal interactive communication with modemWindow and relay.After Dialing
1
3
A
B
C
4–9
Operation (Computer) – 4
Relay Menu
84 %43 &34A
49:459
The Relay menu provides access to the windowsused to set, monitor, or interrogate the relay. Foursubmenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Targetsand Oscillograph
as well as two commands, Write
File To Relay and Read Data From Relay.
84 %43 &34A
49:459
95E%5
The Setup submenu provides three commands:Setup System, Setpoints, and Set Date/Time.The Setup Relay command displays a dialog box(see Figure 4-6) which allows the input of pertinentinformation regarding the system on which therelay is applied (see Section 2.3, Configuration,System Setup).
32 ( 4 ' + + + + + +% % % % % %
&,
!"
6"6
'
(6
175%.
&0 1%0
6." 89 88 878879
'$:#$%
#$%!
6#$%!
6!
66'!
#$%!
!
+%
' 4 ( ; *
#%!
!7
+4
'4
'%
%*
44
(4
4
4
;4
*4
2
Figure 4-6 Setup System Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup Relay window
SETUP SYSTEM COMMAND BUTTONS
Save When connected to a protection system, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom® main window; any changes to the displayed informationare lost.
NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the “operated” stateestablished by an opening rather than a closing external contact.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–10
The Setpoints command displays the Relay Set-points dialog box (see Figure 4-7) from whichthe individual relay function dialog boxes can beaccessed. Choosing a relay function button (#46,for example), will display the corresponding func-tion dialog box (see Figure 4-8).
"#$%&' ! &
*
;) !&01
; !% 1+2
; #$%1+2
8 6%78%%1
#:+22")3
+22"
6 32%+2
9 32%+2
9 3%%+2
(; "2+22"
( "2+2
4' !2%<- #-
';9 2"
'; 2"
' $:
' #$%1% 3%%#$%+2
)
1% ."
*! !.$".
;* +.+22")9
Figure 4-7 Relay Setpoints Dialog BoxPath: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window
COMMAND BUTTONS
Display All Opens the All Setpoints Table dialogbox.
Configure Opens the Configure dialog box.
Cancel Saves the currently displayedinformation and returns to the IPScommain window.
#:
=(>7&936&&?&&+6&!!!&
#:
1
'%
*%
1.
*
* ; ( 4 ' 8 ( 4 ' +# @
; ( 4 ' 8 ( 4 ' +# :"3
1
%
@
32
@A!39B138&1%
1. 32% 632% &C32%
3&3 3&63 3&&3 3&83
2%
2
'
:"3
Figure 4-8 Negative Sequence OvercurrentSetpoint Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/46 command button OR 46 jump hotspot within All SetpointsTable or Configure dialog box
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save When connected to a protectionsystem, sends the currently displayedinformation to the unit. Otherwise,saves the currently displayedinformation and returns you to theRelay Setpoints, All Setpoints Table,or Configure dialog box.
Cancel Returns you to the Relay Setpoints, AllSetpoints Table, or Configure dialogbox; any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.
1
3
A
B
C
4–11
Operation (Computer) – 4
The Relay Setpoints dialog box gives access to two additional dialog boxes: All Setpoints Table andConfigure. Choosing the Display All command button displays the All Setpoints Table dialog box (seeFig. 4-9). This dialog contains a list of settings for each relay within a single window to allow scrollingthrough all relay setpoint configuration values.
Seal-in Time (cycles)SETUP RELAY
V.T. Configuration: Line - LineV.T. Phase Ratio: 1.0 :1
V.T. Neutral Ratio: 1.0 :1V.T. V2 Ratio: 1 :1
C.T. Phase Ratio: 1 :1C.T. Neutral Ratio: 1 :1
Pulse Relay Outputs:
Nominal Voltage: 120 VNominal Current: 5.00 ANominal Frequency: 60 HzPhase Rotation: ABCC.T. 2nd Rating: 5 ASync Check Phase: ABDelta-Y Transform: Disable
OUT 1: 30OUT 2: 30OUT 3: 30OUT 4: 30OUT 5: 30OUT 6: 30OUT 7: 30OUT 8: 30
Phase Angle: 45o
Upper Volt. Limit: 100 VLower Volt. Limit: 90 VSync Check Delay: 50 cyclesDead Volt. Limit: 50 VDead Time Delay: 50 cyclesDelta Voltage: 20 VDelta Frequency: 0.100 HzDead V1 Hot V2: EnableHot V1 Dead V2: EnableDead V1 Dead V2: EnableSupervised by F79: Enable
Input Initiate:
(25) - Sync Check(21) - PHASE DISTANCE
Circle Diameter: 50.0 ΩOffset: 0.0 ΩImpedance Angle: 85o
Time Delay: 30 cycles
#1
Circle Diameter:Offset:Impedance Angle:Time Delay:
#2
Pickup:Time Delay:
Pickup: 108 VTime Delay: 30 cycles#1 #2
Pickup: 108 VTime Delay: 30 cycles
(27) - UNDERVOLTAGE
(27G) - NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup: -0.020 p.u.Time Delay: 120 cycles
Pickup:Time Delay:
#2
Three PhaseDirection:
#1
Three PhaseDirection:
(32) - DIRECTIONAL POWER
(46) - NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT
Definite Time: Inverse Time:
Pickup: 0.10 ATime Delay: 120 cycles
Pickup: 0.50 ATime Dial: 0.5Curve Selection: Def. Time
(50) - INST. PHASE OVERCURRENT
Pickup: 1.0 A
(50G) - INST. NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
! ( X
Figure 4-9 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Display All command button
JUMP HOTSPOTS
` This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to eachrelay dialog box and the Setup Relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return youto the All Setpoints Table dialog box.
CONTROL MENU
Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.
Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–12
Choosing the Configure command button displaysa dialog box (see Fig. 4-10), which contains a chartof programmed input and output contacts, in orderto allow scrolling through all relay output and blockinginput configurations. Both dialog boxes featurehotspots which allow the user to jump from a
X
+ # :"3
* ; ( 4 ' 8 ( 4 '
'DD'
$:
';9
';D
D'
(;D
DD'
D'
4'D
D'
(1.32%
3%#$%
9 3%
9 32#$%
326
)
)3 #:#
)9 6
'
'
8
8
Figure 4-10 Configure Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button
JUMP HOTSPOTS
This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to eachrelay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box.
CONTROL MENU
Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.
Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box.
scrolling dialog box to an individual relay functiondialog box and return to the scrolling dialog boxagain. All available parameters can be reviewed orchanged when jumping to a relay configurationdialog box from either scrolling dialog box.
1
3
A
B
C
4–13
Operation (Computer) – 4
The Set Date/Time command (see Figure 4-11)allows system date and time to be set, or systemclock to be stopped. This dialog box also displaysan LED mimic to identify when the Sync Check isin use (preventing date/time from being changed byuser).
&31&<3,&
3,&5
:
1
'<'<)*
'<<
2
Figure 4-11 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu/ Setup submenu/ Set Date/Time CommandThere is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on this dialog box(the LED is displayed as different shading on amonochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, the relay issynchronized with the IRIG-B signal and the Time field isgrayed out, indicating that this field can’t be changed. Butthe Date field can be changed (by editing and pressingSave).
When the LED is not blue, the relay is not time-synchronized and therefore, both the Date and Time fieldscan be changed.
The time field in the dialog box is not updated continuously.The time at which the dialog box was opened is the timethat is displayed and remains as such. This is true whetherthe relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal or not.
COMMAND BUTTONS
Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop, therelay clock. ‘Stop’ pauses, ‘Start’resumes.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom® mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation is lost.
The Monitor submenu provides access for reviewingthe present status of the M-3520’s measured andcalculated values, other real-time parameters andconditions as well as examining real-time andhistorical demand metering information (see Section4.4, Checkout Status/Metering). A cascading menuappears, providing several command options asshown below.
84 %43 &34A
49:459
+454949+A+A43459&:
The Targets submenu provides three commandoptions: Display, Reset LED, and Clear. TheDisplay command displays the Target Dialog. Thisdialog box (see Figure 4-12) provides detailed dataon target events, including time, date, functionstatus, phase current values, and IN/OUT contactstatus at the time of trip. Individually recordedevents may be selected within the dialog box andsaved into a text file, or be printed out with optionaladded comments. The Reset LED is similar topushing the Target Reset button on the relay’sfront panel, resetting current target(s) displayed onthe relay. This command does not reset any targethistory.
The Clear command clears all stored target data.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–14
84 %43 &34A
49:459
94@49
X
7E7' *' 7E7' *4 E7' *( E7' * E7' * E7' *; E7' ** E7' *
# 2 %
X)*
3%
+%
%
8 ( 4 '
D
* ; ( 4 '
#$% #$% #$% #$%
' ' '
%
=';> 2"D7#$% + =';> 2"D7#$% + =';> 2"D7#$% +
Figure 4-12 Target Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Targets submenu / Display command
COMMAND BUTTONS
Comment Opens comment dialog box forannotation.
Print Prints out selected target information,with comment.
Save Saves selected target information, withcomment, as a text file.
Close Exits the currently displayed dialogbox.
84 %43 &34A
49:459
4%43344
The Oscillograph submenu allows user to storedata on selected parameters for review and plottingat a later time. The Setup command allows theuser to set the number of partitions and triggeringdesignations to be made. The Retrieve commanddownloads and stores collected data to a file; Triggerallows the manual triggering of the recorder; Clearerases the existing record. Run the optionalM-3801A IPSplot® Oscillograph Analysis Softwareprogram to view the downloaded oscillograph files.
!+ !' X
(
4 '
' 4 (
0.! % #%""
1F
""3% ""+%
* ;
( 4 '
Figure 4-13 Setup Oscillograph Recorder
Path: Relay/Oscillograph/Setup
84 %43 &34A
49:459
The Write File To Relay submenu is used to writethe data to the M-3520 relay. The Read Data FromRelay submenu is used to retrieve the data fromthe relay to the computer for display.
Window Menu
% 443
!"
The Window menu enables the positioning andarrangement of any all IPScom® windows so thatthere is better access to available functions. Thisfeature allows the display of several windows at thesame time. Clicking on an inactive window activatesthat window.
Help Menu
'3@
6777+4::
#
The Help menu will enable the user to accessinformation about any IPScom menus orcommands. Contents and Using Help commandsare currently unavailable, and will display as greyedout.
1
3
A
B
C
4–15
Operation (Computer) – 4
The About... screen displays IPScom version anddevelopment information.
Profile Info allows the user to view or makenotations for the relay setpoint data files.
4.3 Cautions
System and IPScom® CompatibilityEvery attempt has been made to maintaincompatibility with previous software versions. Insome cases (most notably with older protectionsystems), compatibility cannot be maintained. Ifthere is any question about compatibility, contactBeckwith Electric.
System PrioritySystem conflicts will not occur, as local commandsinitiated from the front panel receive priorityrecognition. While the unit is in local mode,communication using the serial ports is suspended.IPScom displays an error message to indicate thisfact.
Time and Date StampingTime and date stamping of events is only as usefulas the validity of the unit’s internal clock. Under theRelay menu, the Set Date/TIme command allowsyou to manually set the unit’s clock.
Echo CancelThe Echo Cancel check box, under the Commmenu, should only be used when several relays areconnected using a fiber optic loop network.Otherwise, echo cancel must not be selected orcommunication will be prevented.
Serial Port ConnectionsIf the serial port is connected to something otherthan a modem, and an IPScom modem commandis executed, the results are unpredictable. In somecases, the computer may have to be reset.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–16
,- +".- /!A -
A G
(1) BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. M-3520 ,74'
+0
1''0
#% " H #$%6'
-2
#$%
#$% #$% #% " H
-+0'
! !2 7 89
'03104 '++
138&1
+1-1
<
* ; ( 4 ' ( 4 '
,-1 '050'
8+&1
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
(V) (V) (V)
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
(W) (var) (va)
A G
Figure 4-14 Primary Status Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu/Monitor submenu/ Primary Status window
These are calculated values based on the VT and CT inputs.
,- +". /!A -
A G
,74'
+0 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
1''0
() ) ( * $'+' '+' ,*'+' $-
-2
' ' '
$-(
' ' ' ' ' ' 4
$-) $- * $'+' '+' H
+1-1
* ; ( 4 ' ( 4 '
,-1 '050'
8+&1
A G
-+0'
%. (* %*
' ' '/ '01(2 '' '' '' #3
'03104
2()012
'++'
#34
,"-00
$-() &' '
$-) &' '
$-( &' '
$'+' &' '
Figure 4-15 Secondary Status Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Secondary Status window
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering
1
3
A
B
C
4–17
Operation (Computer) – 4
,- +". /
!A -
A GA G
(1) BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. M-3520 ,74'
G 1
+..%
3 "
*o
Ω '(Ω
Ω 7;(Ω
#$%3 %
Ω
Ω
Ω
327.67 + j327.67
327.67 + j327.67
327.67 + j327.67
*
(
'
7'
7(
7
7*
7* 7 7( 7' ' ( *
Figure 4-16 Phase Distance Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phase Distance window
PHASE DISTANCE CONTROL BUTTONS
Move up the scope window
Move down the scope window
Move the scope window to the left
Move the scope window to the right
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Refresh
,- +". /
!A -
A
A GG
,74'
# #$5$%65*!='>D#$%1%
='>D'#$%1%
=';>D 2"
=';>D' 2"
=';9> 2"
=4'>D!2%<- #-
=4'>D'!2%<- #-
=(1>"+21&
=(3>"+236
=(;>D"+22"
=(;>D'"+22"
=>3%#$%+2
=9>3%+2
=6>32+2
=9>32+2
=)>D+22"
=)>D'+22"
=)3>#:+22"
=)9>+22"
=8>6%%%1
=;1>#$%1+2
=;3>#$%1+2
=*>D
=*>D'
=*>D4
=*>D(
=*!>D!.$".
=*!>D'!.$".
='>$:
=;)>!&01
=;1>!% 1+2
+#
+#'
+#4
+#(
+#
+#
+#;
+#*
3#
3#'
3#4
3#(
3#
3#
3#8
=;3>!% 1+2
=;*>+.
Figure 4-17 Function Status Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu /Monitor submenu / Function Status window
COMMAND BUTTONS
Close Exits the currently displayed dialog box.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–18
- A G
)
4
4
44
';'(
*
'
'
6"%=6>
%=>
6' I
60' I
6' I
6"' I
6'' I
3 I
3 I
30 I
3" I
Figure 4-18 Phasor Diagram
Path: Relay menu/Monitor submenu/Phasor Diagram
COMMAND BOXES
Voltage – Select to display voltage signals.
Currents – Select to display current signals
Freeze – When checked, visible data will not be updated.
! A G
)
'
4
*'
';
'(
44
4
#$%"8+A o
16% 6
1
Figure 4-19 Sync Scope Screen
Path: Relay menu/Monitor submenu/Sync Scope
1
3
A
B
C
4–19
Operation (Computer) – 4
454
4&::
45 3/.
."7"
"7"
3
7'/897'/
2()012
*
' ;
#%23
,$&C
' ; '
'
;
'
G
Figure 4-20 Out-of-Step Screen
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–20
4.5 Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard ShortcutsSYSTEM KEYS
These keys can be used within Windows and IPScom®.
Alt-Tab To switch between applications.
Ctrl-Esc To open Task List dialog box.
Ctrl-Tab To switch between windows.
Arrow Keys To select an application or group icon.
First Character of Name To select application or group icon.
Enter To open selected group or run selected application.
MENU KEYS
These keys enable you to select menus and choose commands.
Alt or F10 To select or cancel selection of the Setup menu on the menu bar..
Left Arrow, Right Arrow To move between menus.
Up Arrow, Down Arrow To move between commands.
A character key To choose the menu or command. The underlined character matchesthe one you type.
Enter To choose the selected menu name or command.
Esc To cancel the selected menu name, or to close the open menu.
DIALOG BOX KEYS
These keys are useful when working in a dialog box.
Alt-a character key To move to the option or group whose underlined letter or numbermatches the one you type.
Arrow Keys To move highlighted selections within list boxes.
Alt-Down Arrow To open a list.
Spacebar To select an item or cancel a selection in a list. Also to select orclear a check box.
Enter To carry out a command.
Esc or Alt-F4 To close a dialog box without completing the command.
Table 4-1 Windows Keyboard Shortcuts
1
3
A
B
C
4–21
Operation (Computer) – 4
4.6 IPSutil™ Communications Software
Miscellaneous
Setup
Monitor Status
Advanced
Help
About...
Clock
RelayComm
Window
Connect
Exit Alt+F4
Comm
Security
Change Comm Access Code
Change Access Level Code
SecurityComm Clock
IPSutility ( Relay M-3520 D-00XX VX.XX.XX )CommRelay HelpMiscellaneous
Figure 4-21 IPSutil Main Menu Flow
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–22
M-3890 IPSutil™The M-3890 IPSutil Communication softwarepackage provides communication with the BeckwithIntegrated Protection System® (IPS) for setting upthe relays. Its main purpose is to aid in setting upIPS relays that are ordered without the optionalfront panel HMI interface.
88888 WARNING: The IPScom® and IPSutilprograms are distributed on the same disk. TheIPSutil program has the capability of overridingthe security parameters set in the relay. It isrecommended that you remove the IPSutilprogram from the IPScom disk and file itseparately in a safe place, to be used byauthorized people. For convenience, BeckwithElectric has distributed both programs on thesame disk.
Installation and SetupIPSutil runs with the Microsoft® Windows operatingsystem, version 3.1 or above, and is available inthe following IBM PC-compatible format:
• one 3.5" double-sided, high-density (DS/HD 1.44 Mb) disk
Hardware RequirementsIPSutil will run on any IBM PC-compatible computerthat provides at least the following:
• 8 Mb of RAM
• Microsoft Windows 95 or later
• one 3.5" double-sided, high-density(DS/HD 1.44 Mb) disk drive
• one serial (RS-232) communication port
InstallationAn installation utility has been provided as a part ofIPScom and IPSutil programs. After installation,the IPSutil can be run from the hard drive bychoosing IPSUTIL.EXE.
System SetupConnect a null modem cable from COM1 of therelay to the PC serial port. IPSutil supports COM1port direct connection only. Modem connection isnot supported. IPSutil program is not supportedthrough COM2 or COM3 ports of the relay.
OverviewIPSutil helps in setting up IPS relays which wereordered without the optional front panel HMI
interface. Units delivered without HMI’s are shippedwith a set of factory default settings for variousparameters that the end user may wish to change.While the utility program is directed to users that donot have HMI, users of HMI-provided relays canalso use IPSutil to set various parameters. Whenthe IPSutil is started, a warning window appears(See Figure 4-22).
A!39 G
3#%$ +0% %$-$$%70%%J% .%%C %3%...7%
+K
Figure 4-22 Warning Message
After the user accepts the warning, access isgranted to the IPSutil main menu.
The following sections describe each IPSutil menuitems.
Comm Menu
%6 %* :% #
The Comm menu allows the user to connect to therelay. This is the first command that must be usedto access the unit. After you click the Connectsubmenu item, the Communications dialog box isdisplayed (See Figure 4-23).
4
G+""
+,
%%
##
/
!
'
(*
'(
)
+
%+,
Figure 4-23 Communications Dialog Box
• Select the correct PC communication portwhere the null modem cable is connectedfor the relay.
• Select the baud rate of the relay. Factorydefault is 9600 baud.
• Select the access code resident in therelay. Factory default is 9999.
• Click “Open com” button.
The following message window will appear showingCOM opened. Now, the title bar will display therelay model and the software version.
1
3
A
B
C
4–23
Operation (Computer) – 4
,74'+
,- G
+K
The Exit submenu allows you to quit IPSutil™. Ifthe relay was connected, this submenu disconnectsthe relay. When the relay was connected, if youhave made any changes for some parameters (forexample, baud rate, phase rotation) the followingmessage window appears.
,- G
J%$"%%"$0..21-%$%$-L
+K
Relay Comm
%6 %* :% #
NOTE: If COM1 baud rate is changed and therelay is reset, the new baud rate mustbe used to communicate with COM1
When Relay Comm menu is selected, the RelayComm Port Settings dialog box appears (SeeFigure 4-24). It allows you to set the relaycommunication ports COM1 or COM2/COM3 baudrate. For COM2/COM3, it allows you to set theprotocol and dead synch time. Additionally, forCOM2 and COM3, if you select MODBUS protocol,the dialog box allows you to enable the parityoption.
;:)!5</
!!"#$%&' G
;:4;:7)!5</
%(!!*5
;: ;:7
)% )% :;2)=:;2)=
2!%5 2!%5
$*5 1. ;!! $*5 1. ;!!
77
;> %
)5 ) ) )5 ) )
Figure 4-24 Relay Comm Port Settings
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayed information to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Any changes to the displayed information is lost.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–24
Clock
%6 %* :% #
When the Clock menu is selected, the Set UnitDate/Time dialog box appears, allowing the user tostart or stop the clock in the relay, and change thedate or time (See Figure 4-25).
&31&<3,&
3,&5
:
1
'<'<)*
'<<
2
Figure 4-25 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS
Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop theclock of the relay. The ‘Stop’ stops theclock in the relay. The ‘Start’ resumesthe clock in the relay.
Save When connected to the protectionsystem, the date and time informationon the display is sent to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation is lost.
There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on thisdialog box (the LED is displayed as different shadingon a monochrome monitor). When this LED is blue,the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signaland the Time field is grayed out, indicating that thisfield can’t be changed. But the Date field can bechanged (by editing and pressing Save).
When the LED is not blue, the relay is not time-synchronized and therefore, both the Date andTime fields can be changed. The time field in thedialog box is not updated continuously. The time atwhich the dialog box was opened is the time that isdisplayed and remains as such. This is true whetherthe relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal ornot. IPSutil is fully Y2K compliant.
Security Menu
%*
A355
A3
The Security Menu allows you to set thecommunication access code and the level accesscodes for the relay.
NOTE: Setting the access code to 9999 disablessecurity.
The Change Comm Access Code allows you toassign new communication access code to therelay. The range of the access code is 1 to 9999.Note that the access code 9999 is a factory default.See Figure 4-26.
G
.-%% ////
-%% ////
+K
Figure 4-26 Change Communication AccessCode Dialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayedinformation to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation is lost.
The Change Level Access Code allows you toassign three different levels of access code for therelay functions accessibility. The range of the levelaccess code is 1 to 9999. See Figure 4-27.
1
3
A
B
C
4–25
Operation (Computer) – 4
6 G
-82%%
.-82%% //// //// ////
////////////
82 82' 824
+K
Figure 4-27 Change Level Access CodeDialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayedinformation to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation is lost.
Miscellaneous Menu
:%
8464
The Miscellaneous menu allows you to set andmonitor some of the relay parameters.
The Setup feature (Figure 4-28) allows the user tochange the Logo information, test outputs, assigncommunication address and user control number,phase rotation, OK LED flash mode in the relay.Note that the highest number used for thecommunication address is 255 and the highestcontrol number allowed is 9999.
&% 9#, - . ! / 0 1 *
&
&
?1=$
'43
*
1
H%@%&7
8$0!1"
6
6
'44564 *
&HA
+A
&H
Figure 4-28 Setup Dialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayed information to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Any changes to the displayed information is lost.
1
3
A
B
C
M-3520 Instruction Book
4–26
The Monitor Status feature (See Figure 4-29) allowsthe user to monitor and clear the error code counters,monitor the check sums, and to view inputs teststatus. Note that powerloss counter cannot becleared.
Calibration is unavailable, and will be greyed-outin display.
Help Menu
# 6777
Under Help, the About... submenu provides youthe information on the IPSUtil version numbers.
&:*
444
%4
. ! / 0 1 *
&
A25
64</ *"
4
:
:$*
:$1
:$0
55
+2
44
&'%*
&'%1
&'%0
&'%/
&'%!
&'%.
&'%-
&'%,
45
+D4
&H
*/-
**"
,
"
*,
11
1-
-
"
/1
/!
1,
"
"
/**1
1/
Figure 4-29 Monitor Status Dialog Screen
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayed information to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Any changes to the displayed information is lost.
Installation – 5
5–1
55555 Installation Installation Installation Installation Installation
5.1 General Information .................................................................... 5–1
5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions .............................................. 5–1
5.3 External Connections ................................................................. 5–6
5.4 Commissioning Checkout .......................................................... 5–8
5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ...................................... 5–10
5.1 General Information
NOTE: Prior to installation of the equipment, it isessential to review the contents of thismanual to locate important data that maybe of importance during installationprocedures. The following is a quickreview of the contents in the chapters ofthis manual.
It is suggested that terminal connections illustratedherein be transferred to station one-line wiring andthree-line connection diagrams, station paneldrawings and station DC wiring schematics.
If during the commissioning of the relay, additionaltests are desired, refer to Chapter 6, Testing.
The operation of the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay,including the initial setup procedure, is described inChapter 3, Operation (Front Panel). If the relay isnot provided with an HMI module, refer to Chapter 4,Operation (Computer).
Section 3.1, Front Panel Controls, describes thefront panel controls, and Section 3.2, Initial SetupProcedure/Settings describe the HMI setupprocedure. The procedures contain specificinstructions for entering the communications data,unit setup data, configure relay data, individualsetpoints and time settings for each function, andoscillograph recorder setup information. A similarsetup can be performed using IPScom® and IPSutil™software packages.
5.2 Mechanical/PhysicalDimensions
Figures 5-1 through 5-4 contain physical dimensionsthat may be required for mounting the unit to a rack.
M-3520 Instruction Book
5–2
17.31 [43.97]ACTUAL
5.21 [13.23]ACTUAL
5.28 [13.41]
17.50 [44.45]
10.20 [25.91]
19.00[48.26]
17.78 [45.16]
18.58 [47.19]
2.35 [5.96]
1.35 [3.42]
Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY ISNOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT
Rear View
0.40 [1.02] x 0.27 [0.68] SLOT (4x)
Figure 5-1 M-3520 Mounting Dimensions – Horizontal Chassis
Installation – 5
5–3
Optional Vertical Mount Chassis
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets arein centimeters.
17.78[45.16]
18.58[47.19]
2.25[5.72] 1.71
[4.34]
19.00[48.26] 17.31
[43.97]Actual
5.59[14.20]
5.65[13.41]
17.50[44.45]
ACTUAL
0.40 [1.02] x0.27 [0.68]SLOT (4x)
Rear View
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY ISNOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT
Figure 5-2 M-3520 Mounting Dimensions – Vertical Chassis
M-3520 Instruction Book
5–4
.261 [0.66]Diameter4 Holes
19.00[48.26]
6.19[15.72]
Max. Depthof Unit:
Front View
10.50[26.67]
RecommendedPanel CutoutDimensions
.39[0.99]
18.21[46.25]
8.72[22.15]
2.80[7.12]
2.80[7.12]
8.72[22.15]
2.25[5.71]
1.91[4.85]
NOTE: Dimensions inbrackets are in centimeters.
Figure 5-3 (H2) Mounting Dimensions
Installation – 5
5–5
.75 6.13[15.57]
.261 [0.66]Diameter6 Holes
7.78[19.76]
20.78[52.78]
7.63[19.38]
8.72[22.15]
Max. Depthof Unit:
Front View
10.50[26.67]
8.72[22.15]
2.80[7.12]
2.80[7.12]
2.60[6.60]
1.14
RecommendedPanel CutoutDimensions
15.56[39.52]
18.50[46.99]
5.56[14.12]
1.04[2.64]
NOTE: Dimensions in bracketsare in centimeters.
Figure 5-4 (H3) Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet
M-3520 Instruction Book
5–6
5.3 External Connections
Figure 5-5 provides an explicit view of all the externalcontacts, com-munications points, and power fusesof the M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay.
NOTE: Output contacts #1 through #4 are high-speed operation contacts. To fulfill ULand CSA requirements, terminal blockconnections must be made with No. 12AWG solid or stranded copper wireinserted in an AMP #324915 or equivalent.The screws attaching the connector mustbe tightened to 8-inch pounds torque.Only dry contacts may be connected toINPUTS (terminals 5 through 10, with 11common), because these contact inputsare internally wetted.
CAUTION: Application of external voltages tothe INPUT terminals may result in damage to theunit.
!
"
#!
!$
%
%
%
%
&!
&!
'
#! % !
&(!
&#!
!
)*+
!
!
!#
#
$
!
&!
&!
&,)
+
,
,
,%
-
!
-
( !'
'
.
'
) +
,(
/
%
'
'
(
'
'
(
#&#!
Figure 5-5 External Connections
Installation – 5
5–7
Figure 5-6 Three-Line Connection Diagram
A
B
C
52-2
52-1
A
B
C
35 3736 38
M-3520
A
B
C
M-3520 Typical Three-lineConnection Diagram
44 43
Power
F
R
A
B
C
A
B
C
42 41
M-3520
4142
M-3520
A B C
51 50
49 48
47 46
M-3520
53 52M-3520
40 39
VAB VBC VCA V2
36 38 4035 37 39
M-3520
44 43
V2VA VB VC
9 1110 8 16 1361 63
M-3520
34 32
15 1260 62 33 31
IN 152b
IN 2 IN 3 INRTN
52bOtherInputs
PS2 PS1
+
Self-Test
P/S OUT1
Self-TestAlarmFailure
PowerOKStatusAlarm
52-1Trip
52a
Alarm
A
B
C
A
BC
Alternate Phase VTConnection
IA
IB
IC
IG
Alternate VTConnection
M-3520 Instruction Book
5–8
8. Press ENTER to display positivesequence voltage. The positivesequence voltage should be V
POS y
VA y V
B y B
C y or V
AB y V
BC y V
CA.
POS SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Volts
9. Press ENTER to display negativesequence voltage. The negativesequence voltage should be V
NEG y 0.
NEG SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Volts
10. Press ENTER to display zerosequence voltage. The zero sequencevoltage should be V
ZERO y 0.
ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Volts
NOTE: If negative sequence voltage shows ahigh value and positive sequencevoltage is close to zero, the phasesequence may be incorrect. Properphasing must be achieved to obtainproper readings. If phase sequence isincorrect, frequency related functionswill not operate properly and theFREQUENCY STATUS menu will readDISABLED.
If positive, negative and zero sequence voltagesare all present, check the polarities of VTconnections and correct the connections to obtainproper polarities.
11. Press EXIT. The unit will display:
VOLTAGE STATUSVOLT curr freq powr
12. Press the right arrow once, so thatthe unit displays:
CURRENT STATUSvolt CURR freq powr
5.4 Commissioning Checkout
During field commissioning, perform the followingprocedure to ensure that the CT and VT connectionsare correct.
1. On the keypad, press ENTER. After ashort delay, the unit should display:
VOLTAGE RELAYVOLT curr freq pwr
2. Press the right arrow button until the unitdisplays:
STATUS config sys STAT
3. Press ENTER. The unit should display:
VOLTAGE STATUSVOLT curr freq powr
4. Press ENTER to display the phasevoltages. The unit should display eitherV
A V
B, V
C, for line-to-ground connections
or VAB,
VBC,
VCA
, for l ine-to-lineconnections). Use a voltmeter to comparethese actual measurements. If there is adiscrepancy, check for loose connectionsto the rear terminal block of the unit.
PHASE VOLTAGEAB= BC= CA=
5. Press ENTER to display the peak phasevoltage.
PEAK PHASE VOLTAGE (PU)AB= BC= CA=
6. Press ENTER to display the neutralvoltage. Neutral voltage should be V
N=0
Volts
NEUTRAL VOLTAGE Volts
7. Press ENTER to display V2 phasevoltage.
PHASE VOLTAGE (V2) Volts
Installation – 5
5–9
20. Press ENTER to display the nominalsystem frequency:
FREQUENCY BUS 160.00 Hz
21. Press ENTER for the unit to display therate of change frequency:
RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY Hz/Sec
22. Press EXIT for the unit to display
FREQUENCY STATUSvolt curr FREQ powr
23. Press right arrow button once so thatunit displays:
POWER STATUSvolt curr freq POWR
24. Press ENTER to display real power andverify the correct polarity. The polarityshould be positive for forward powerand negative for reverse power. If thereadings do not agree with actualconditions, check the polarities of thethree low end CT’s and /or the PT’s andthe CT and PT ratios.
REAL POWER PU W
25. Repeat steps for the remaining meteringquantities.
REACTIVE POWER______ PU ______ VAr
APPARENT POWER______ PU ______ VA
POWER FACTOR______ Lag/Lead
13. Press ENTER to display line currents (IA,
IB, I
C). Compare these currents with the
measured values using a meter. If thereis a discrepancy, check the CTconnections to the rear terminal blockof the unit. The unit should display:
PHASE CURRENTA= B= C=
14. Press ENTER for the unit to displayneutral current. The neutral currentshould be near zero amperes.
NEUTRAL CURRENT Amps
15. Press ENTER for the unit to displaypositive sequence current. The positivesequence current should be I
POS y I
A y
IB y I
C.
POS SEQUENCE CURRENT Amps
16. Press ENTER for the unit to displaynegative sequence currents. Negativesequence current should be near zeroamperes.
NEG SEQUENCE CURRENT Amps
17. Press ENTER for the unit to display thezero sequence currents. The zerosequence should be I
ZERO y 0.00. If
there is a significant amount of negativeor zero sequence (greater than 25% ofIA, I
B, or I
C) then either the phase
sequence or the polarities are incorrect.Modify connections to obtain properphase sequence and polarity.
ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENT Amps
18. Press EXIT for the unit to display :
CURRENT STATUSvolt CURR freq powr
19. Press right arrow button once so thatunit displays:
FREQUENCY STATUSvolt curr FREQ powr
M-3520 Instruction Book
5–10
REPMUJ NOITISOP NOITPIRCSED
5JBotA 6niPnolangiSLTTB-GIRIdetaludomeD
CotB )gnitteStluafeD(CNBlangisB-BIRIdetaludoM
01J*224/584SRmho002()rotsiseRnoitanimreT
BotA )detanimreT(detresnIrotsiseR
CotB )gnitteStluafeD()ybdnatS(detcennoCtoNrotsiseR3MOC
64JBotA .1MOChtiwetarduabserahs3MOC
CotB )gnitteStluafeD(2MOChtiwetarduabserahs3MOC
85J*BotA .delbaneylsuounitnocrevieceR
CotB )gnitteStluafeD(.gnittimsnartelihwdelbasiDrevieceR
06JBotA )gnitteStluafeD(rotcennoc2MOCfo1niPotlangisDCstcennoC
CotB lanretxerotcennoc2MOCfo9niPotV51+stcennoC
16JdetresnI .lanretxerotcennoc2MOCfo9niPotV51-snoitcennoC
devomeR ecivedMOC)gnitteStluafeD(rotcennoc2MOCfo9niPstcennocsiD
.desahcrupsinoitpoeriw-4,584-SRehtnehwelbaliavaylnoera85dna01srepmuJ*
Table 5-1 Jumper Settings
HCTIWSSNOITISOP NOITPIRCSED
1 2 3 4 degnahcebtondluohssehctiwStinuotdeilppasirewopelihw
U X X X rofnwod,ylppuSrwPlaudrofpUelgnis
X 0253-MnolanoitcnuftoN
X X U U edoMnuR
X X U D ylnOesUyrotcaF
X X D UdnasedocsseccaezilaitinIotsretemarapnoitacinummoc
.*seulavtluafed
X X D D **,*etarbilaC
retfA.purewopneht,hctiwstes,nwodrewoP*KOYALEReht,purewop DEL ffosniamerthgil
neebsahnoitareponehwlthgillliwDELGAIDdna.detelpmocylirotcafsitas
,stupniecnerefertcennoc,tsujda,nwodrewoP**.purewop
Table 5-2 Switch Positions
5.5 Circuit Board Switches andJumpers
Installation – 5
5–11
Figure 5-7 M-3520 Circuit Board
R69C93
D75
TP6
U35
CO
.INC
.
C14
R184
C40
C41
U21
R154
P3
R182R183
C3
6
VR
9
L13
P2
C3
7
C97
L7
L5
L6
L8
51
C42+
J50
J51
B C
B C
L10
L9
L11
L12
R13
J58
C39
AB
+
+C
D8
J10B
A
C15
D43 V
R4
L4
L1
L2
L3
D91
BC A
D90
J5
C18
VR
1
D71
L27
R24D18
C47
R66
R13
0
L25
D69
C76
R12
8
L26
VR
5
C74
D70R
129
R67D44
VR
6
L24
R68D45
C78
D68R
127
TP2
C199
C20
1
C200
D23
D73
U40
R185
C15
1
T1
C65
C71R48
C6
4
R49
D32
D38
J61RT2
A
A
E129
J60
B
C53
CA
E93
C69
+
C
+
U22
C43
R15
3
R15
2R
T1
C5
1C
197
R31
C5
2
R61
C7
0
R60
R30
C6
8
R57
D21
D36
R56
C50
R26
R27
C19
6R138
D20
D74
R62 R58
R46
C67
C66
R52
D34
D40
R53
R50
R44
C6
1C
63
R2
8
C73
R54
C6
2C
72
R64
C60
R86C
57
R1
37
C59
R40
C5
6C
58
R35
R45
D30
R65
D28
R41
R4
2R
38
D25
R34
D27
R36
R88
R89
C154
+ C22
3
R4
D1
1
R123
R15
5
R15
0
C1
94
D9
C250
C96
C22
1R
151
R9
C22
2 U44
J69
R134R135
R139
C19
5
R11
R1
U2
C168
R132
R8
R133
C27D
12
J68
J67
R12
C16
6
U28
C16
7
C95
U27
Q1
R25
7
C165
C16
4
C94
U29
R256
C25
R140
D76
R7
U42
C161
R6
U8
R1
22
R5
E112
D13
C15
9
C29
R158
U15 R115
R13
6
C55
R114C2
27
C5
4
R37
R33
C226
U16
C16
0
D4
D3 D6
C158
+C30
D7
8
R32
R157
R15
9R8
7
+ U45
C15
7
C225
R91
C15
3
J64
C15
2
R3
C10
8
D5
C10
7
A
C2
D1
C11
5
C114
R83
BC
E105
E30
C113
E187
1
U41
C22
4C
R14
3
U3+
C20
C23
C22
C11
2C11
8
BA
J63
J62
+
+
C119
C218
D80
C11
6
C22
0
C24
TP3
R14
7 +
+
+
P7
91
168
5
P6
1
84
10P81
P4
189
61
C84
D66
VR
7
L23
VR
8
C80
R12
6
D67
D46
R70
D47
D50
L22C82
R12
5
C149
C146
VR
20
L28
VR22
VR19
C136
VR17
C135
VR18
C127
VR16
C137C134
C138
VR21
C139
VR15
C133C140
C132
C141
VR14
VR13
C142
C131
C143
VR12
C130
VR11
C144
C129
VR3
C128
+
E1
27
E12
6
R1
41C45
C21
5
U23
C16E1
43
E184E110
E178
E109
E183
R15
6
C20
3
C26
BE
CK
WITH
ELE
CT
RIC
C16
3
U31
U30
C92
C16
2
C145
C91
U3
2
BE
#450-00266P
-2256 RE
V.
R118
R119
K10
C126
D60
K9
C20
2
R121
Q8
C20
6
J53
Q10
C3
+
J49
C3
8
U36
J56
C11
7
C219
C150
+
BT1
D7
2
1
C205
Y1
J48
C204
U37
C217
R131
C14
8
R14
6
+
J1ABC
C3
5J82
J45
E180
K7
R11
7
K8
D59
D57
C34
1
TP5
R22
J46
BC A
E47E1
13
E48
1
D56
D55
K6
U26
C11
C21
6
C12
3
E14
5
E142
U18
C9
R92
11
C19
R20
R23
E1
07
E12
4
E12
3
U14E1
15
J3
R14
4
C32
E1
85
E119J4
C21
0
C12
5C
208
C207
R10
J2
U11
1
E1
32
E1
31
C21
3
U10
E13
5E
16
4
E1
30
E16
0E
134
E1
66
E1
11
E1
33
E1
25
E1
63
C180
E162
P9
10
5
P10
TP4TP
1
10
2 19
1
U1
C8
J6
C171
C173
C172
C31
JP3
R98C174
C176
J70 E14
7
C178
+
C184
C175
C177
C179+
C12
2
E12
2
1 R145
P5
2
R16
1
U92526
C188
C21
2C5
1
R14
C193
C181
C182
C190
C192
C191
C189
U19
C186
C187
C185
R94 C10
C183
1
Q9
R11
6E177
D77
SW
2
R21
LED
4
C121
+
U12
+
K5
D54
K4
D61
C14
7
+
J19
R12
0
D62
C86
E120
K3
K2
+
R72
C85 D
64
R71
C49 D6
3
U13
C20
9
U24
J47
U25
A
E18
6
U25
J15
J14
C6
Q12
C120
C13
E2
J16
C21
1
E1
E1
61
E1
16
E16
5
J71
J72
J17
R142
C12
4
U7
C21
C4
C17
0
D2
+
C44
U43
E167E1
69
E168
E176
1
C198
E175E1
70
E181
E182
C33
U4
K1
R2
5
C16
9
C25
1
E172
E173
E174
E171
+
R20
0
L19
R20
1
++
+
1
R15
1
R18
J57
C7
R14
9
R19
4
U6
Q1
1
C1
7R17
C46
+
J52
R124
SW
11
Q20
R14
8
E128
J80
C214
E153
C10
1C1
02
E158
E154
+
+
C12
E149
+L14
P1
C99
+
C98
1
L15
C10
0+
L18
1
L17
L16
LED
1LE
D3LE
D2
E159
E150
U17
E151
L21
5
L20
J 60
J 61
J 58
J 10
J 5
J 46
Dip
Sw
itch
Testing – 6
6–1
6 Testing
6.1 Equipment and Test Setup ........................................................ 6–2
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ...................................................... 6–3
6.3 Automatic Calibration ............................................................... 6–10
6.4 Input Configurations ................................................................. 6–11
6.5 Functional Test Procedures ..................................................... 6–1221 Phase Distance (#1 or #2) ................................................. 6–1325 Sync Check ......................................................................... 6–1527 Undervoltage, 3 Phase ....................................................... 6–1727G Undervoltage, Neutral ....................................................... 6–1832 Reverse/Forward Power ...................................................... 6–1946DT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time ............. 6–2146IT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time .............. 6–2247 Negative Sequence Overvoltage ........................................ 6–2350 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent ...................................... 6–2450G Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent, Neutral ..................... 6–2551V Inverse Time Overcurrent, Phase ................................... 6–2651G Inverse Time Residual Overcurrent, Neutral ................... 6–2759 Overvoltage, 3-Phase (#1 or #2) ........................................ 6–2859I Peak Overvoltage, 3-Phase .............................................. 6–2959G Neutral Overvoltage ......................................................... 6–3060FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ................................................ 6–3167DT Definite Time Directional Overcurrent ........................... 6–3267IT Inverse Time Directional Overcurrent ............................. 6–3367NDT Residual Definite Time Directional Overcurrent ......... 6–3467NIT Residual Inverse Time Directional Overcurrent ........... 6–3678 Out of Step ......................................................................... 6–3879 Reconnect ........................................................................... 6–3981 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, or #4) ............................................ 6–4081R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2) ............................ 6–41
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–2
6.1 Equipment and Test Setup
The M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay has beencalibrated and fully tested at the factory. If calibrationis necessary because of component replacement,follow the Auto-Calibration Procedure described inSection 6.3.
Automatic Calibration NOTE: If necessary, refer to Figures 6-2, 6-3,
and 5-4 for reference to the HMI andTARGETS controls and LEDs, and rearconnections.
Required EquipmentThe following equipment is required to carry out thetest procedures:
• Two Digital Multi-meters (DMM) with a 10Amp current range. These are not requiredif using a Pulsar Universal Test System.
• One power supply for the relay, capable ofsupplying 120 V ac or 125 V dc for unitswith high voltage power supplies, or 24 Vdc for units with Low Voltage powersupplies.
• One 3-phase voltage source capable of 0to 250 V ac. (Pulsar Universal Test Systemor equivalent.)
• One 3-phase current source capable of 0 to25 Amps. (Pulsar Universal Test Systemor equivalent.)
• Electronic timer with a minimum accuracyof 8 ms. (Pulsar Universal Test System orequivalent.)
NOTE: A single-phase frequency tester may beused: 48 to 59.99 Hz for 60 Hz units; 38 to49.99 Hz for 50 Hz units
Equipment Setup CAUTION: The proper voltage range for the relayis clearly marked underneath each of the powersupply inputs.
1. Connect power to the relay’s power inputterminals 62 and 63. The M-3520 may beconfigured with a high voltage powersupply with a nominal voltage input of110/120 /230/240 V ac or 110/125/220/250 V dc. The relay is also available witha low voltage power supply with nominalvoltage input of 24/48 V dc, and aredundant power supply, which is availableas an option.
2. Connect the voltage and current inputs foreach test procedure according to theconfiguration included with each testdescription and follow the outlined steps.It is recommended to disable anyfunctions that may operate whileperforming tests on a particular function.
3. Table 6-1 identifies the functions todisable.
Testing – 6
6–3
ELBASIDOTNOITCNUF
NOITCNUFGNIEBDETSET
12 52 72 G72 23 64 74 05 G05 V15 G15 95 I95 G95 LF06 76 N76 87 97 18 R18
12
52
72
G72
23
64
74
05
G05
V15
G15
95
I95
G95
LF06
76
N76
87
97
18
R18
Table 6-1 Functions to Disable When Testing
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures
The diagnostic procedures perform basic functionaltests to verify the operation of the relay’s front panelcontrols, LEDs, input and outputs, and communicationports. These tests are performed in diagnostic mode,which is entered in the following manner:
NOTE: The Diagnostic Mode is intended for benchtesting the relay only. Do not use thediagnostic mode in relays that are installedin an active protection scheme.
For units with the optional HMI panel:
1. Press ENTER to begin main menu.
2. Press the right arrow button until SETUPUNIT appears in the top line of the display.
3. Press ENTER to access the SETUP UNITmenu.
4. Press the right arrow button untilDIAGNOSTIC MODE appears in thedisplay.
5. Press ENTER. A reset warning appears:
PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE
88888 WARNING: ALL RELAY FUNCTIONS ANDPROTECTION WILL BE INOPERATIVE WHILE THERELAY IS IN DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
6. Press ENTER. Unit will now reset andDIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarilydisplayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST(RELAY). This is the beginning of thediagnostic menu.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–4
7. When testing in DIAGNOSTIC MODE iscomplete, press EXIT until the followingmessage appears:
PRESS EXIT TOEXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE
8. Press EXIT again to exit DIAGNOSTICMODE. The relay will reset and normalrunning mode will resume.
NOTE: Pressing any button other than EXIT willreturn the user to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
Output Test (Relay)The first step in testing the operation of the functionoutputs is to confirm the positions of the outputs inthe unoperated or OFF position. This can beaccomplished by connecting a DMM across theappropriate contacts and confirming open or closedcontacts. The de-energized or OFF positions foreach output is listed in Table 6-2, Output Contacts
tuptuO/yaleRrebmuN *tcatnoCnepOyllamroN desolCyllamroN
tcatnoC
1 33 43 A/N A/N
2 13 23 A/N A/N
3 92 03 A/N A/N
4 72 82 A/N A/N
5 52 62 A/N A/N
6 32 42 A/N A/N
7 12 02 12 22
8 81 71 81 91
)tseT-fleS(9 51 41 51 61
)ylppuSrewoP(01 A/N A/N 31 21
dezigrene-edroFFOehtotsdnopserroctcatnocehtfonoitisop"lamroN"*.yalerehtfoetats
Table 6-2 Output Contacts
For units with optional HMI panel:
Enter Diagnostic Mode as previously outlined.Following completion of testing, the output contacts,can be turned ON in the following manner:
1. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
RELAY NUMBER1
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
RELAY NUMBER 1OFF on
3. Use the right button to highlight ON inuppercase letters, which signifiesselection. The following is displayed:
RELAY NUMBER 1off ON
4. Press ENTER. Output Relay #1 willenergize. The following is displayed:
RELAY NUMBER1
5. Choose output numbers 2–8 by using theup and down arrow buttons to turn allrelays or outputs to the energized or ONposition. When each output is turned on,the appropriate OUTPUT LED turns onand stays on.
6. Use the DMM to verify the position of theoutput contacts in the “operate” or ONposition. The readings should be theopposite of the initial reading above. Alloutputs should be returned to their initialde-energized or OFF positions. TheOUTPUT LED’s will extinguish when eachoutput is turned off.
7. If Output Relay testing is complete, pressEXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MODEmenu.
Input Test (Status)The INPUT TEST menu enables the user to determinethe status of the individual status inputs.
For units with optional HMI panel:
Each input can be selected by its number using theup and down buttons. The status of the input will thenbe displayed.
TUPNIREBMUN
NRUTERLANIMRET
TUPNIREBMUN
)b25(1 11 01
2 11 9
3 11 8
4 11 7
5 11 6
6 11 5
Table 6-3 Input Contacts
Testing – 6
6–5
1. When OUTPUT TEST (RELAY) isdisplayed press the right arrow to displaythe following:
INPUT TESToutput INPUT led target
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
INPUT NUMBER1
3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT OPEN
4. Connect IN RTN, terminal #11, to IN1,terminal #10.
5. Alternatively, if the input in step 4 aboveis being used in this application andexternal wiring is complete, the actualexternal status input contact can bemanually closed. This will test the inputcontact operation and the external wiringto the input contacts. The following isimmediately displayed:
INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT CLOSED
6. Disconnect IN RTN, terminal #11, fromIN1, terminal #10. The following isimmediately displayed:
INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT OPEN
7. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
INPUT NUMBER1
8. Use the up button to go to the next input.Repeat the procedure using the contactsas shown in Table 6-3, Input Contacts.
9. When finished, press EXIT to return to theDIAGNOSTIC MODE menu.
Status LED TestThe STATUS LED TEST menu enables the user tocheck the front panel LED’s Individually.
*
+ * $
%
+
!*
267!89!%% %
%!%$
Figure 6-1 Status LED Panel
For units with the optional HMI panel:
1. When INPUT TESTS (STATUS) isdisplayed, press the right arrow buttonuntil the following is displayed:
STATUS LED TESToutput input LED target
2. Press ENTER. LED #1, RELAY OK,illuminates and the following is displayed:
STATUS LED TESTLED NUMBER 1 = ON
3. Repeat step 2 for each of the 5 remainingLED’s shown in Figure 6-1. The PS1 andPS2 LED’s are not subject to this test.
4. When STATUS LED testing is complete,press EXIT to return to DIAGNOSTICMODE.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–6
Target LED Test NOTE: This test is not applicable to units that are
not equipped with the M-3915 TargetModule.
The TARGET LED TEST menu allows the user tocheck the M-3915 Target Module LEDs individually.
*!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Figure 6-2 M-3915 Target Module
For units with the optional HMI panel:
1. When STATUS LED TEST is displayed,press the right button until the following isdisplayed:
TARGET LED TESToutput input LED target
2. Press ENTER. Target LED #1 illuminatesand the following is displayed:
TARGET LED TESTLED NUMBER 1 = ON
3. Repeat step 2 for each of the remainingtarget and output LED’s shown in Figure6-2.
4. When TARGET LED testing is complete,press EXIT to return to DIAGNOSTICMODE.
Expanded I/O TestThis function is not implemented at this time.
Button Test NOTE: This test is only applicable to units that
are equipped with the M-3931 HMI Module.
The BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the userto check the M-3931 HMI Module Keypad. As eachbutton is pressed, its name is displayed.
5
Figure 6-3 M-3931 Human-MachineInterface Module
1. When the TARGET LED TEST isdisplayed, press the right button until thefollowing is displayed:
BUTTON TEST ex_io BUTTON disp
2. Press and hold ENTER. The following isdisplayed:
BUTTON TESTENTER
3. Release ENTER. The following isdisplayed:
BUTTON TEST0
4. Repeat this test for each of the buttons onthe keypad and the TARGET RESETbutton.
5. Press EXIT to exit from test.
NOTE: The EXIT button should be tested last.Notice the word EXIT is displayedtemporarily before the test sequence isterminated.
Testing – 6
6–7
Display Test NOTE: This test is only applicable to units that
are equipped with the M-3931 HMI Module.
The DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables theuser to check the alphanumeric display. This testcycles through varying test patterns until the EXITbutton is pressed.
1. When BUTTON TEST is displayed, pressthe right arrow button until the following isdisplayed:
SCREEN TEST ex_io button DISP
2. Press ENTER. The unit will display asequence of test characters until the EXITbutton is pressed.
3. After the test has cycled completelythrough the characters, press EXIT toreturn to the DIAGNOSTIC MODE menu.
Communication Tests NOTE: These tests are only applicable to units
that are equipped with the M-3931 HMIModule.
COM1 and COM2 TestThe COM1 and COM2 LOOPBACK TESTS allow theuser to test the front and rear RS-232 ports for properoperation. These tests require the use of a loop-backplug (see Figure 6-4).
The loop-back plug consists of a DB9P connector,with pin 2 connected to pin 3 and pin 7 connected topin 8.
M-3520COM1/COM2
DB9P1
RX 2TX 3
4SGND 5
6RTS 7CTS 8
9
Figure 6-4 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug
1. When DISPLAY TEST is displayed, pressthe right arrow button until the following isdisplayed:
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST COM1 com2 com3 com3
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
COM1 LOOPBACK TESTCONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG
3. Connect the loopback plug to COM1.
4. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST19200 PASS...
5. Press ENTER to test each of the baudrates. When all baud rates have beentested, press ENTER. The following isdisplayed:
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST-DONE-
6. Press the right arrow until the following isdisplayed:
COM2 LOOPBACK TEST com1 COM2 com3 com3
7. Repeat steps 2-5 to test COM2.
COM3 Test (2-Wire)The COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE allows the user totest the RS-485 rear terminal connections for properoperation.
NOTE: This test requires a PC with an RS-485converter and terminal emulator softwareinstalled.
1. When COM3 LOOPBACK TEST 4WIREis displayed, press the right arrow buttonuntil the following is displayed:
COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE com1 com2 com3 COM3
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIREIDLING....9600, N, 8, 1
3. On the rear of the unit, connect a PC tothe relay at terminals 3 (-) and 4 (+) usingan RS-485 converter set for 2 wireoperation. See Figure 6-5 for diagram.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–8
COM 3RS485
-
RX TX4W
2W
-+ +
1 2 3 4
Laptop computer
RS-232 to RS-485 converter or PC card
(2 wire)
5 5
Figure 6-5 RS-485 2-Wire Testing
4. Set the following PC communicationsparameters:
Baud Rate 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Duplex Half
5. Open the terminal emulator program onthe PC and open the COM port for theRS-485 converter.
6. Press a key on the PC keyboard. Verifythat the character pressed showstemporarily on the display of the relay andappears on the PC monitor.
7. When communications has been verified,press EXIT. The following is displayed:
COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE-DONE-
8. Close the COM port on the PC and exitthe terminal emulator program.
COM3 Test (4-Wire) NOTE: This test is only applicable to units that
have the RS-485 4-Wire option installed.
The COM3 LOOPBACK TEST 4WIRE allows theuser to test the RS-485 rear terminal connections forproper operation.
1. When DISPLAY TEST is displayed, pressthe right button until the following isdisplayed:
COM3 LOOPBACK TEST 4WIRE com1 com2 COM3 com
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
COM3 LOOPBACK TEST 4 WIRECONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG
3. On the rear of the unit, connect a jumperfrom terminal 1 to terminal 3 and fromterminal 2 to terminal 4. See Figure 6-6 fordiagram.
COM 3RS485
-
RX TX4W
2W
-+ +
1 2 3 4
Figure 6-6 RS-485 4-Wire Testing
4. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
COM3 LOOPBACK TEST19200 PASS...
5. Press ENTER to test each of the baudrates. When all baud rates have beentested, press ENTER. The following isdisplayed:
COM3 LOOPBACK TEST-DONE-
Clock Test1. When COM3 ECHO TEST 4WIRE is
displayed, press the right arrow buttonuntil the following is displayed:
CLOCK TEST CLOCK led cal factory
2. Press ENTER. A display similar to thefollowing is shown:
CLOCK TEST03-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000
Testing – 6
6–9
3. Press ENTER again to toggle the clock. Ifthe clock is running, it will stop. If clockhas stopped, it will start. The clock stopcase is shown below.
CLOCK TEST-CLOCK START-
4. Press ENTER and verify the relay clockis running. A display similar to the followingis shown with the seconds counting:
CLOCK TEST03-JAN-1998 09:0035.000
5. Press ENTER again to stop the clock.The following is displayed:
CLOCK TEST-CLOCK STOP-
6. Press ENTER and verify the relay clockis stopped. A display similar to thefollowing is shown with the secondsstopped:
CLOCK TEST03-JAN-1998 09:01:80.000
NOTE: When the relay clock is stopped theseconds will be displayed as 80. If theunit is removed from service or is to bewithout power for long periods of time, theclock should be stopped to preservebattery life.
7. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to restart the clock.
Flash Relay OK LEDThe Flash Relay OK LED function is provided toenabled or disable the flashing of the Relay OK LED.This function only has effect while the relay is innormal operating mode and will not be noticed whilein Diagnostic Mode.
The operation of this function may be tested bycompleting the following steps:
1. When CLOCK TEST is displayed, pressthe right arrow button until the following isdisplayed:
FLASH RELAY OK LED clock LED cal factory
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
FLASH RELAY OK LEDoff ON
NOTE: Please be advised that programming theOK LED to remain on indefinitely is notrecommended. It is possible that the LEDOK would remain lit even if the relayfailed.
Factory Use OnlyThis function is provided to allow access by factorypersonnel.
FACTORY USE ONLY clock led cal FACTORY
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–10
6.3 Automatic Calibration
The relay has been fully calibrated at the factory.There is no need to recalibrate the unit prior toinstallation. Recalibration is only necessary if acomponent was changed.
For units with the optional M-3931 HMI:
8 WARNING: ALL RELAY FUNCTIONS ANDPROTECTION WILL BE INOPERATIVE WHILE THERELAY IS IN DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1. Navigate to the Auto Calibration functionin the Diagnostic Mode menu. Thefollowing is displayed:
AUTO CALIBRATION clock led CAL factory
2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTSPRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE
3. Connect all voltage inputs in parallel (VA=
VB=V
C= V
2) and apply 120.00 (±0.01) V
AC s0°. See Figure 6-7.
4. Connect all current inputs in series(I
A=I
B=I
C=I
N) and apply 5.00 (±0.01) Amps
s0°. See Figure 6-8. For 1 Amp CT models,use 1.0 (±0.01) Amps s0°.
5. Press ENTER to start calibration. Thisprocess takes less than 5 seconds. Theunit will display the following while theautomatic calibration is in progress:
AUTO CALIBRATION-WAIT-
6. When the unit has completed calibration,the following will be displayed:
AUTO CALIBRATION-DONE-
7. The calibration can be checked by usingthe Monitor Status menu, see Section3.3, Checkout Status/Metering.
For units without the optional M-3931 HMI:
It is possible to auto-calibrate Intertie ProtectionRelays that are not equipped with the optional M-3931HMI. The procedure is similar to HMI equipped units:
1. Power down unit.
2. Refer to Figure 6-8 and place unit incalibrate mode by configuring the properdip switches.
3. Connect all voltage inputs in parallel.
4. Connect all current inputs in series.
5. Power up unit.
6. DIAG LED will light when operation iscomplete.
7. Power down unit and return dip switchesto normal position.
35
36VoltageInput120 VAC0°
VA
Hot
Neutral
VB
VC
39
40
37
38
VG
41
42
43
44V2
Figure 6-7 Voltage Calibration Configuration
46
CurrentInput
IA
Polarity 47
48IB
49
50IC
51
52IG
53
5 Amps0o
Figure 6-8 Current Calibration Configuration
Testing – 6
6–11
6.4 Input Configurations
The phase angles shown here represent leadingangles as positive and lagging angles as negative.Some manufacturers of test equipment use laggingangles as positive, in which case V
B=120 V ACsssss120°
and VC=120 V AC sssss240°. Other voltage and current
phase angles should be adjusted in the same manner.
39
40
VoltageInput 3 120o
VC120°
Hot
Neutral
35
36
VoltageInput 10o
VA0°
Hot
Neutral
37
38
VoltageInput 2120o
VB-120°
Hot
Neutral
Figure 6-9 Voltage Inputs, Configuration V1
38
39VoltageInput 1 VA
30°
Hot
Neutral
VoltageInput 2
Hot
Neutral
VB-90°
VC150°42
43
40
41
30°
90°
Figure 6-10 Voltage Inputs, Configuration V2
46
CurrentInput 1 IA 0°
Polarity 47
48
Polarity 49
CurrentInput 2
IB -120°
50
Polarity 51
CurrentInput 3 IC 120°
Figure 6-11 Current Inputs, Configuration C1
52
CurrentInput 1
IN 0°
Polarity 53
Figure 6-12 Current Inputs, Configuration C2
Current Input 10°
,A
,G
0°
,B-120°CurrentInput 2120°
,C 240°
Figure 6-13 Current Inputs, Configuration C3
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–12
6.5 Functional Test Procedures
This section details the test quantities, inputs andprocedures for testing each function of the M-3520Intertie Protection Relay. The purpose is to confirmthe function’s designated output operation, theaccuracy of the magnitude pickup settings, and theaccuracy of time delay settings. Whereas the firsttest described, “Power On Self Test,” does notrequire electrical quantity inputs, all other functionaltests require inputs, and the necessary connectionconfigurations as specified in the test procedure.
In all test descriptions, a process for calculatinginput quantities to test the actual settings of thefunction will be given if needed. In many test cases,it will be necessary to disable other functions notbeing tested at the time. This action is to prevent theoperation of multiple functions with one set of inputquantities that could cause confusion of operation ofoutputs or timers. The complete description of themethod to disable or enable functions may be foundin detail in Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, orChapter 4, Operation (Computer). The completedescription of the method to install setting quantitiesis found in detail in Section 3.2, Setpoints and TimeSettings.
It is desirable to record and confirm the actual settingsof the individual functions of the relay beforebeginning test procedures. Use the FUNCTIONALCONFIGURATION RECORD FORM and theSETPOINT AND TIMING RECORD FORM found inAppendix A for recording settings.
The tests are described in this section in ascendingfunction number order as in Chapter 2, Application.Depending on which functions are to be tested at agiven time, an order may be determined with the aidof Table 6-1, Functions to Disable When Testing.This may result in fewer changes in connections anddisable and enable operations.
During the lifetime of the relay, testing of individualfunctions due to changes in application settings willbe more likely than an overall testing routine. Anindex of the individual test procedures is illustratedat the beginning of this chapter.
NOTE: Care must be taken to reset or re-enableany functions that have been changedfrom the intended application settings whenthe test procedures are complete. When afunction is re-enabled, both outputarrangements and blocking inputdesignations must be reestablished.
It may be desirable to program all test settings in analternate profile, or to save the relay settings inIPScom® to preserve a particular setup.
Many options for test sequences and methods arepossible. As an example, the operation of the outputcontacts can be tested along with the operation ofthe LED’s in the Diagnostic Test Procedures. Theoperation of the output contacts may also beconfirmed with the LED and function operation duringFunctional Test Procedures, Section 6.5, if desired.
NOTE: Output 8 has been especially designed tobe used as the Reconnect output. Anyprotective function assigned to this outputwill not display a target LED if it operates.
If timer quantities are to be checked, the timer mustbe activated by the appropriate output contacts. Thecontact pin numbers are enumerated in Table 6-2 ,Output Contacts.
It is suggested that copies of the following be madefor easy referral during test procedures:
• Input Configurations - page 6–11
• Output Test (Relay)- page 6–4
• Relay Configuration Table - page A–2
• Setpoint & Timing Record Form - pagesA–9 to A–12
Testing – 6
6–13
21 Phase Distance (#1 or #2) Line to Line
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Diameter C Ohms (0.1 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500.0)
Offset O Ohms (–100 to 100)5 Amp CT Rating (–500.0 to 500.0)
Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 60FL, 21 (1 or 2) DisableDelta-Y Transform Disable
NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (Diameter plus Offset)setting first (lower current), and test the lower reach setting operation, since the higher reach settingoperation can be tested without disabling the lower setting.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect input in Configuration V1 and C1 as designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows:a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (C ohms + O ohms) offset, O, usually set at zero ohms.b. Define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage / S3) I R ohms). The voltage level may be selected
based on the desired test current level.
5. Pickup Test: Set the three-phase voltages to the Selected Voltage value from step 4. Set the phaseangle between the voltage and current inputs at (A –30°) degrees from setting above. Hold theTARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the three-phase currents until the appropriatePHASE DISTANCE 21 LED light goes on, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The level should be equal to I calculated in step 4 with the resulting impedance ±0.1 ohms or5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the INPUT CURRENTS, and OUTPUTLEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply approximately 110% of the current (I)found in step 4, and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this configuration.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–14
21 Phase Distance (#1 or #2) Line to Ground
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Diameter C Ohms (0.1 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500.0)
Offset O Ohms (–100 to 100)5 Amp CT Rating (–500.0 to 500.0)
Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
VT Configuration Line-Ground
Function 60FL, 21 (1 or 2) DisableDelta-Y Transform Disable
NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (Diameter plus Offset) setting first(lower current), and test the lower reach setting operation, since the higher reach setting operationcan be tested without disabling the lower setting.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect input in Configuration V1 and C1 as designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows:a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (C ohms + O ohms) offset, O, usually set at zero ohms.b. Define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage)IR ohms). The voltage level may be selected based on
the desired test current level
5. Pickup Test: Set the three-phase voltages to the Selected Voltage value from step 4. Set the phaseangle between the voltage and current inputs at (A) degrees from setting above. Hold the TARGETRESET button in and slowly increase the three-phase currents on the input until the appropriatePHASE DISTANCE 21 LED light goes on, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The level should be equal to I calculated in step 4 with the resulting impedance K0.1 ohms or5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the INPUT CURRENTS, and OUTPUTLEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply approximately 110% of the current (I)found in step 4, and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this configuration.
Testing – 6
6–15
25 Sync Check
VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: 79 Supervise 25 Disable
Phase Angle Limit PA Degrees (0 to 90)
Voltage LimitsUpper Limit UL Volts (60 to 140)Lower Limit LL Volts (40 to 120)
Sync Check Delay SD Cycles (1 to 8160)
Delta Volt DV Volts (1.0 to 50.0)
Delta Freq DF Hz (0.001 to 0.500)
Dead V1 See Below
Dead V2 See Below
Dead V1 & V2 See Below
Dead Input Enable DIN Input (1 to 6)
Dead Delay DD Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 27 #1, #2 DisableFunction 47 #1, #2 DisableFunctions 59, 59I DisableFunction 81 #1,2,3,4 Disable
NOTE: The 25 function requires only one phase voltage and V2 for testing in the Line-to-Ground configuration.The phase voltage used for reference may be selected through the System Setupmenu. The following tests will reference the phase voltage as V1, although any phase may be usedfor testing. Line-to-Line testing will follow the same procedures, with V1 representing the proper Line-to-Line phase input. Each test below can be performed using any of the three phases as a reference.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Phase Angle Limit Test: Apply Nominal Voltage to V1 and V2, and establish a phase angledifference of more than PA +5°. Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the phaseangle difference until Output Z LED operates or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The angle difference should be equal to PA ±1°. Release the TARGET RESET button andincrease the angle difference, and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
4. Upper Voltage Limit Test: Apply voltage 5V higher than UL to both V1 and V2. Hold the TARGETRESET button in and slowly decrease the voltage on V1 until Output Z LED operates, or the pickupindicator operates on the computer target screen. The voltage should be equal to UL 0.5V or±0.5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and increase the voltage and the OUTPUT LED will goout. If desired, repeat the test using V2.
5. Lower Voltage Limit Test: Apply voltage 5V lower than LL to both V1 and V2. Hold the TARGETRESET button in and slowly increase the voltage on V1 until Output Z LED operates, or the pickupindicator operates on the computer target screen. The voltage level should be equal to LL ±0.5V or±0.5%. Relase the TARGET RESET button and decrease the voltage, and the OUTPUT LED will goout. If desired, repeat the test using V2.
6. Sync Check Time Delay Test: Apply Nominal Voltage to V1 and V2, and establish a phase angledifference of more than PA +5°. With the output contacts connected to a timer, remove the phaseangle difference and start timing. The contacts will close after SD cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or
1%.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–16
7. Delta Voltage Test: Set the Upper and Lower Voltage limits to their maximum and minimum values,respectively. Set V2 to 140 V and V1 to 80 V. Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowlyincrease the voltage on V1 until Output Z LED operates, or the pickup indicator operates on thecomputer target screen. The voltage difference should be equal to 0.5 V. Release the TARGETRESET button, and decrease the voltage, and the OUTPUT LED will go out. If desired, repeat thetest using V2 with V1 at 140 volts.
8. Delta Frequency Test: Set V1 and V2 to Nominal Voltage, and set the frequency of V1 to 0.05 lowerthan Nominal Frequency –DF. Hold the TARGET RESET button in, and slowly increase thefrequency of V1 until Output Z LED operates, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The frequency difference level should be equal to DF 0.0007 Hz or 5%. Release theTARGET RESET button and decrease the frequency, and the OUTPUT LED will go out. If desired,repeat the test using V2 with V1 at Nominal Frequency.
9. Dead Volt Limit Test:
Dead V1 Test: Enable Dead V1 and disable Dead V2 (if enabled). Set V2 to Nominal Voltage, and V1to DVL +5 V. Hold the TARGET RESET button in, and slowly decrease the voltage on V1 untilOutput Z LED operates, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The voltagelevel should be equal to DVL 0.5 V or 5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and increasethe voltage level and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
Set V1 to Nominal Voltage, and decrease V2 below DVL and verify that the function does notoperate.
Dead V2 Test: Enable Dead V2 and disable Dead V1 (if enabled). Set V1 to Nominal Voltage, and V2to DVL +5 V. Hold the TARGET RESET button in, and slowly decrease the voltage on V2 untilOutput Z LED operates, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The voltagelevel should be equal to DVL 0.5 V or 5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and increasethe voltage level and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
Set V2 to Nominal Voltage, and decrease V1 below DVL, and verify that the function does notoperate.
Dead V1 and V2 Test: Enable Dead (V1 & V2) . Disable Dead (V1) and Dead (V2), if enabled. Set V1and V2 to DVL +5 V. Hold the TARGET RESET button in, and slowly decrease the voltage on V1and V2 until Output Z LED operates, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen.The voltage level should be equal to DVL 0.5 V or 5%. Release the TARGET RESET button andincrease the voltage level and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
Set V1 to Nominal Voltage, decrease V2 below DVL, and verify that the function does not operate.
Set V2 to Nominal Voltage, decrease V1 below DVL, and verify that the function does not operate.
10. Dead Input Enable Test: Select one of the Dead Inputs (DIN) and activate it. Repeat step 9, verifythat the function operates as in step 9. Deactivate the DIN and repeat step 9 once more. Verify thatthe function does not operate. Disable Dead Input feature when this step is complete.
11. Dead Timer Test: Enable Dead V1 & V2. Disable Dead V1 and Dead V2 (if enabled). Set V1 and V2to DVL +5 V. With output contacts connected to a timer, remove V1 and V2 and start timing. Thecontacts will close within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.
12. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
Testing – 6
6–17
27 Undervoltage, 3 Phase (#1 or #2)
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 60FL DisableFunction 27#1 or #2 DisableFunctions 25, 79 Disable
NOTE: If 27#1 and 27#2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the highersetting first and test the lower setting operation, since the higher setting operation could then betested without disabling the lower.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect voltage input in Configuration V1 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup, for configuration. Set at Nominal Voltage.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the input voltage on phase Auntil the 27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator operates on thecomputer target screen. The level should be equal to P volts 0.5V or ±5%*. Release the TARGETRESET button and increase the input to the nominal voltage and the OUTPUT LED will extinguish.Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply (P-1) Volts and begin timing. Thecontacts will close after D cycles within –1 or +3 cycles or 1%.
6. Test phases B and C by repeating steps 4 and 5.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
* When both RMS and Line-to-Ground to Line-to-Line is selected, the accuracy is 0.8V or .75%.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–18
27G Undervoltage, Neutral
VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)
Functions 59G, 79 Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect voltage input to VG, terminals 41 & 42. Set at 105% of Pickup P.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the neutral voltage until 27GNEUTRL UNDERVOLTAGE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator operates on the computertarget screen. The level should be equal to P volts 0.5V or 5%. Release the TARGET RESETbutton and increase the input to the nominal voltage and the OUTPUT LED will extinguish. PressTARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply (P-1) Volts and begin timing. Thecontacts will close after D cycles within –1 or +3 cycles or 1%.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
Testing – 6
6–19
32 Directional Power, #1 or #2 (Line to Line)
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V2
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P PU (–3.00 to +3.00)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)
Function 32 (#1 or #2) DisableFunctions 59, 59I, 60FL DisableFunctions 27, 79. 50, 51V Disable
NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the lower pickup setting first and test the highersetting operation. Since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the highersetting, the 32 functions will be enabled when the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V2 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual power setting is as follows:Multiply the PU pickup value (P above) by the Nominal Current).
5. Set the three phase voltages to the Nominal Voltage.
6. Pickup Test – Over Power: Press and hold the TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton and slowlyincrease the three phase currents (for negative or reverse power flow direction the phase angle of thephase currents are set at 180 degrees from the respective phase voltages). Increase the currentsuntil the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on theFunction Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in step 4, 0.02 PUor 2%.
7. Pickup Test – Under Power: Press and hold the TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton. Fornegative or reverse power flow direction, the phase angle of the phase currents are set at 180degrees from the respective phase voltages. Start with a current calculated in Step 4, ±10%, thenslowly decrease the current until the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED light goes on or the pickupindicator operates on the Function Status screen.
8. Release the TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton and decrease the currents. Press TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton to remove targets.
9. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of thepickup current and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within ±2 cycles.
10. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this configuration.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–20
32 Directional Power, #1 or #2 (Line to Ground)
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P PU (–3.00 to +3.00)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 or 8)
Function 32 (#1 or #2) DisableFunctions 27, 79, 50, 51 Disable
NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the lower pickup setting first and test the highersetting operation. Since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the highersetting, the 32 functions will be enabled when the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V2 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual power setting is as follows:Multiply the PU pickup value (P above) by the Nominal Current).
5. Set the three phase voltages to the Nominal Voltage.
6. Pickup Test – Over Power: Press and hold the TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton and slowlyincrease the three phase currents (for negative or reverse power flow direction, the phase angle ofthe phase currents are set at 180 degrees from the respective phase voltages). Increase the currentsuntil the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on theFunction Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in step 4, 0.02 PU or
2%.
7. Pickup Test – Under Power: Press and hold the TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton. Fornegative or reverse power flow direction, the phase angle of the phase currents are set at 180degrees from the respective phase voltages. Start with a current calculated in Step 4, 10%, thenslowly decrease the current until the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED light goes on or the pickupindicator operates on the Function Status screen.
8. Release the TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton and decrease the currents. Press TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton to remove targets.
9. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of thepickup current and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 2 cycles.
10. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this configuration.
Testing – 6
6–21
46DT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time
VOLTAGE INPUTS: None
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1 (MODIFIED)
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.10 to 20.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.02 to 4.00)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 46 Inverse Time DisableFunction 50 DisableFunctions 51V, 79 Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration C1 (MODIFIED) designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, InputConfigurations for configurations. The modification to C1 is to exchange Current source 2 and 3connections. Configuration will be Phase B current from source 3 and Phase C current fromsource 2.
NOTE: For proper testing use current below 3 times CT rating.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the three-phase current untilthe NEG SEQ DEF TIME O/C 46DT LED illuminates or the pickup indicator operates on thecomputer screen The level of operation will be equal to Pickup Current P ±0.1 Amp ( 0.02 for 1 Ampunits) or 3%, whichever is higher. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the three-phase current to a level below the Pickup Current P and the OUTPUT LED will extinguish. Press theTARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply three-phase current at least 1.1 timesP and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within –1 or +3 cycles or 3%. Reduceapplied current to 0 Amps
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–22
46IT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time
VOLTAGE INPUTS: None
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1 (MODIFIED)
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.5 to 5.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.1 to 1.00)
Standard Inverse Time Curves1:Curve C (1 to 4)Time Dial TD (0.5 to 11.0)
IEC Inverse Time Curves1:IEC Curve C (5 to 8)IEC Time Dial TD (0.05 to 1.10)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 46 Inverse Time DisableFunction 50 DisableFunction 51V, 79 Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration C1 (MODIFIED) designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, InputConfigurations for configurations. The modification to C1 is to exchange Current source 2 and 3connections. Configuration will be Phase B current from source 3 and Phase C current fromsource 2.
NOTE: For proper testing use current below 3 times CT rating.
4. IEC Curve Testing: Test current level may be chosen as a multiple of any level within the Pickup (P)range. Calculate the operating time for the applied current and appropriate Time Dial (TD) settingfrom the table below. Choose 4 or 5 test levels and calculate the operating times for each.
Standard Curve Testing: The operating time will be read from Appendix D, Negative SequenceCurrent Inverse Time Curves for the applied current and appropriate Time Dial (TD) setting. Thecurve portions extending to lower than P current values are inactive and can be ignored.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply currents equal to the multiple of theInverse Time Pickup (P) chosen in Step 4, and start timing. The operating time will be as calculatedin step 4, ±3 cycles or ±5%.
Curve 5
!"# $
Curve 6
%
!# $
Curve 7
&
!"# $
Curve 8
"
!# $
IEC Class AStandard Inverse
IEC Class BVery Inverse
IEC Class CExtremely Inverse
IEC Class DLong Time Inverse
t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
1Either a Standard Curve or an IEC Curve must be selected.
Testing – 6
6–23
47 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1 (Modified)
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output ( 1 to 8)
Function 59, 27, 79 Disable
NOTE: Although no current input is required for the testing of the 47 function, it is suggested that NominalCurrent be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation.If other functions operate during these tests, they will need to also be disabled for the test and re-enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. The modification of V1 connection to to exchange voltage source V2 and V3 connections. Theresulting configuration will be Phase B voltage, supplied from voltage source 3, and Phase Cvoltage, supplied from voltage source 2.
4. Pickup Test: Apply 3-phase voltage 5 volts below pickup (P). Hold the TARGET RESET button inand slowly increase the voltage applied until the 47 NEG SEQ OVERVOLTAGE LED lights or thepickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The level should be equal to P volts ±0.5volts or 5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease applied voltage, and the OUTPUTLED will go out. Press the TARGET RESET button again to remove targets.
5. Time Test: Apply voltage 10% less than pickup (P) to all three phases. With output contactsconnected to a timer, apply P + 10% volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles,within –1 to +3 cycles or 3%.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–24
50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent
VOLTAGE INPUTS: None
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (1.0 to 240.0)1 Amp CT Rating (0.2 to 48.0)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 51V Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration C1 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, Input Configurations,for configurations.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the Phase A current until the50 PHASE INST O/C LED illuminates or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The level of operation will be P Amps 0.1 A ( 0.02 A for 1 Amp units) or 3%. Releasethe TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT LED’s will extinguish. PressTARGET RESET button to remove targets. This test may be repeated for each of the other phases.
5. Time Test: With output contact (Z) connected to the timer, apply current 5% above pickup (P) andstart timing. The operating time will be under 4 cycles.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
Testing – 6
6–25
50G Instantaneous Overcurrent, Neutral
VOLTAGE INPUTS: None
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C2
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.5 to 240.0)1 Amp CT Rating (0.1 to 48.0)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 51G Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration C2 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, Input Configurations,for configurations.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the neutral current until the50G NEUTRL INST O/C LED illuminates or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The level of operation will be P Amps 0.1A ( 0.02 A for 1 Amp units) or 3%. Releasethe TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT LED’s will extinguish. PressTARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contact (Z) connected to the timer, apply current 5% above pickup (P) andstart timing. The operating time will be under 4 cycles.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–26
51V Inverse Time Overcurrent, Phase
VOLTAGE INPUTS: None
CURRENT INPUTS: C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.50 to 12.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.10 to 2.40)
Standard Inverse Time Curves: 1
Curve C (1 to 4)Time Dial TD (0.5 to 11.0)
IEC Inverse Time Curves: 1
IEC Curve C (5 to 8)IEC Time Dial TD (0.05 to 1.10)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 50, 67 Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect current inputs in Configuration C1 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, InputConfigurations, for configurations.
4. Refer to Appendix D. Calculate test times for levels represented on the graphs. It is suggested that4 or 5 test levels be chosen.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply current used in calculations from step4 and start timing. The operating time will be ±3 cycles or 5% of calculated time. Repeat this step foreach test level chosen. The tested points verify the operation of this function.
Curve 5
!"# $
Curve 6
%
!# $
Curve 7
&
!"# $
Curve 8
"
!# $
IEC Class AStandard Inverse
IEC Class BVery Inverse
IEC Class CExtremely Inverse
IEC Class DLong Time Inverse
t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup
6. Voltage Control Test: Input voltages at least 5% under the Voltage Control setting V.a. With output contacts connected to the timer, apply current equal to the chosen test level
calculated in step 4 on phase A, and start timing. The operating time will be as read from theappropriate Inverse Curve Family and K (Time Dial) setting. Repeat this step for all test levelschosen. The curve portion extending to lower than 150% of X amps are inactive and can beignored. The tested points verify the operating times of the function.
b. The input voltage may be increased over the Voltage Control setting by at least 0.5 Volts, andthe function will drop out.
7. Voltage Restraint Test: Input Nominal Voltages and test as in step 6 above (same current inputvalues). Repeat step 6 above with reduced input voltage values and current reduced by anequivalent percentage as the voltage reduction.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
1Either a Standard Curve or an IEC Curve must be selected.
Testing – 6
6–27
51G Inverse Time Residual Overcurrent, Neutral
VOLTAGE INPUTS: None
CURRENT INPUTS: C2
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.25 to 12.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.05 to 2.40)
Standard Inverse Time Curves: 1
Curve C (1 to 4)Time Dial TD (0.5 to 11.0)
IEC Inverse Time Curves: 1
IEC Curve C (5 to 8)IEC Time Dial TD (0.05 to 1.10)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedures.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect current inputs in Configuration C2 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, InputConfigurations, for configurations.
4. Refer to Appendix D. Calculate test times for levels represented on the graphs. Choose 4 or 5 testlevels and calculate test times for each.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, apply current used in calculations from step4 and start timing. The operating time will be 3 cycles or 5% of calculated time. Repeat this stepfor each test level chosen. The tested points verify the operation of this function.
Curve 5
!"# $
Curve 6
%
!# $
Curve 7
&
!"# $
Curve 8
"
!# $
IEC Class AStandard Inverse
IEC Class BVery Inverse
IEC Class CExtremely Inverse
IEC Class DLong Time Inverse
t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
1Either a Standard Curve or an IEC Curve must be selected.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–28
59 Overvoltage, 3-Phase (#1 or #2)
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Functions 60FL , 79 DisableFunction 59 #1 or #2 Disable
NOTE: If 59 #1 and 59 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with thelower setting first and test the higher setting operation, since the lower setting operation could thenbe tested without disabling the higher setting.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setupfor configuration. Set Voltages to Nominal voltage
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the input voltage on phase Auntil 59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE LED light goes on, or the pickup indicator operates on thecomputer target screen. The level should be equal to P volts 0.5 V or 5%. Release the TARGETRESET button and decrease the input voltages to nominal voltage and the OUTPUT LEDs will goout. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts being connected to the timer, apply (P+1) Volts on phase A andstart timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
* When both RMS and Line-to-Ground to Line-to-Line is selected, the accuracy is 0.8 V or .75%.
Testing – 6
6–29
59I Peak Overvoltage, 3-Phase
VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P1 PU (1.05 to 1.50)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Functions 59, 79 Disable
NOTE: If function 59 settings are greater than the 59I setting being tested, it is not necessary to disable.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setupfor configuration. Set voltages to Nominal Voltage.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in, and slowly increase the voltage applied to PhaseA until the 59I PEAK OVERVOLTAGE LED goes on or the pickup indicator operates on thecomputer target screen. The level should be equal to P PU 0.3 PU. Release the TARGET RESETbutton and decrease the input voltage and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESETbutton to remove targets. This test may be performed on each phase, if desired.
5. Time Test: With output contacts being connected to the timer, apply (P+5) Volts and start timing.The contacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
1 Accuracy of the function only applies to voltages below 180 Volts.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–30
59G Neutral Overvoltage
VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Functions 27G, 79 Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect voltage input to terminal numbers 41 and 42.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the input Neutral voltage until59G NEUTRL OVERVOLTAGE LED illuminates or the pickup indicator operates on the computertarget screen. The level should be equal to P volts ±0.5 V or 5%. Release the TARGET RESETbutton and decrease the input voltage and the OUTPUT LED’s will extinguish. Press TARGETRESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts being connected to the timer, apply P+1 volts and start timing. Thecontacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
Testing – 6
6–31
60 FL VT Fuse Loss Detection
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 27, 32, 79 Disable
NOTE: It is necessary for “FL” to be designated as an initiating input (see Section 2.3 Setpointsand Time Settings, 60FL Fuse Loss) before this function can be tested.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations.
4. Adjust the three-phase voltage source to nominal volts, and the three-phase current source tonominal current.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, remove the A phase voltage input and starttiming. The operating time will be Y cycles within –1 to +3 cycles and the 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSLED and output Z LEDs will light, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen.
6. Reconnect the phase A voltage and press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for phases B and C.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this configuration.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–32
67DT Phase Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time
VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS: C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (1.0 to 240.0)1 Amp (0.2 to 48.0)
Directional See Below
Three Phase Detect See Below
Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
MSA MSA Degrees (0 to 359)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 32 DisableFunction 47 #1, #2 DisableFunctions 50, 51V, 59 DisableFunctions 67IT, 67NDT, 67NIT Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations.
4. Single-Phase Pickup Test: Disable Directional and Three-Phase Detect features, if enabled. ApplyNominal Voltage to all three phases. Apply current 10% less than pickup (P) to all three phases. Holdthe TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the current applied to phase A until the DIRPHASE DEF TIME O/C 67DT LED lights, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer targetscreen. The level should be equal to P amps ±0.1 Amps or 3%. Release the TARGET RESETbutton and decrease phase A current and the OUTPUT LED will go out. Press the TARGET RESETbutton again to remove targets. If desired, repeat this test for both phase B and C currents.
5. Three-Phase Pickup Test: Enable the Three-Phase Detect feature and perform test #4 again toverify that the relay does not operate. Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases.Apply current 10% less than pickup (P) to all three phases. Hold the TARGET RESET button in andslowly increase the current applied to all phases until the DIR PHASE DEF TIME O/C 67DT LEDlights, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The level should be equal to Pamps 0.1 Amps or 3%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the applied currentand the OUTPUT LED will go out.
6. Directional Test: Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases. Set the current angleto an angle more than 100° from MSA. Apply current 10% more than pickup (P) to all three phases.Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly swing the angle of the currents applied toward MSAuntil the DIR PHASE DEF TIME O/C 67DT LED lights, or the pickup indicator operates on thecomputer target screen. The angle should be equal to A –90° or +90°, depending to which side ofMSA the current has been set. Release the TARGET RESET button and swing the current angleaway from MSA, and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
7. Timer Test: Disable the Directional and Three-Phase Detect features, if enabled. Apply NominalVoltage to all three phases. Apply current 10% less than pickup (P) to all three phases. With outputcontacts connected to a timer, apply P+10% Amps and start timing. The contacts will close after Dcycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 3%.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
Testing – 6
6–33
666667IT Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time
VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS: C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.5 to 12.0)1 Amp (0.1 to 2.4)
Directional Disable
Standard Inverse Time Curves1
Curve C (1 to 4)Time Dial TD (0.5 to 1.1)
IEC Inverse Time Curves1
Curve C (5 to 8)IEC Time Dial TD (0.05 to 11.0)
MSA MSA Degrees (0 to 359)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 32 DisableFunction 47 #1, #2 DisableFunctions 50, 51V, 59 DisableFunctions 67NIT DisableFunction 67NDT Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Pickup Test: Refer to Appendix D, Inverse Time Curves and the table below in order to calculatetest times for levels represented on the graphs. It is suggested that 4 or 5 test levels be chosen.
4. Time Test: With output contacts being connected to the timer, apply input current used incalculations from step 3 to all 3 phases and start timing. The operating time will be ±3 cycles or ±5%of the calculated time. Repeat this step for each test level chosen. The points tested verify theoperation of this function.
Curve 5
Curve 6
Curve 7
Curve 8
IEC Class AStandard Inverse
IEC Class BVery Inverse
IEC Class CExtremely Inverse
IEC Class DLong Time Inverse
t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup
5. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
1Either a Standard Curve or an IEC Curve must be selected.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–34
67NDT Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time
VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below
CURRENT INPUTS: See Below
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.50 to 240.0)1 Amp (0.1 to 48.0)
Directional See Below
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
MSA C MSA Degrees (0 to 359)
Polarization Type C (1 to 5)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 27G, 32 DisableFunction 47 #1, #2 DisableFunctions 50, 51V, 59 DisableFunctions 67IT, 67NIT Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Enable directional feature and connect inputs as listed in table below, for the polarization typeselected for testing.
NOTE: This feature is designed for use with the Line-to-Ground VT configuration.
NOITAZIRALOPEPYT PUTES
1 Cdna,B,Asesahptnerrucdna,lellarapnidecalpCdna,B,AsesahPegatloV.seiresnidecalp
2 seiresnidecalpCdna,B,Asesahptnerruc;egtalovlartueN .
3 tnerrucAesahpylppadnaecneuqesevitagenllufhtiwsegatlovesahp-3decnalaB.ylno
4 epytnoitaziralopsihT.seiresnidecalpCdna,B,Asesahptnerruc;tnerruclartueN.oreztatessihcihw,erutaef)ASM(elgnAytivitisneSmumixaMesutonseod
5 pirtehtnitnerruclartuenro,lellarapniCdna,B,AsesahpegatlovrehtiEI3otecnereferninoigerZERO
.)4ro1epytees(noitidnocpirteviglliw
4. Pickup Test: Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases. Apply current 10% less than pickup (PI3) toall three phases. Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the current applied to allphases in the above table, until the RES DIR DEF TIME O/C 67NDT LED lights, or the pickupindicator operates on the computer target screen. The level should be equal to PI3 Amps 0.1A or
3%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the applied current, and the OUTPUT LEDwill go out.
C These settings are in a separate menu labeled Neutral Dir Setup.
Testing – 6
6–35
5. Directional Test: Enable directional feature. Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all threephases. Set the current angle to an angle more than 100° from MSA. Apply current 10% more thanPI3, (for type 3, use P) to all three phases. Hold the Target Reset button in and slowly swing theangle of the currents applied towards the MSA until the RES DIR DEF TIME O/C 67NDT LED lights,or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The angle should be equal to A –90°or +90°, depending to which side of MSA the current has been set. Release the TARGET RESETbutton and swing the current angle away from the MSA, and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
NOTE: MSA is not used in type 4.
6. Time Delay Test: Disable the Directional and Three-Phase Detect features, if enabled. ApplyNominal Voltage to all three phases. Apply current 10% less than PI3, (for type 3, use P) to all threephases. With output contacts connected to a timer, apply P+10% Amps, and start timing. Thecontacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 3%.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–36
67NIT Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time
VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below
CURRENT INPUTS: See Below
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.50 to 240.0)1 Amp (0.1 to 48.0)
Directional See Below
Standard Inverse Time Curves1
Curve C (1 to 4)Time Dial TD (0.05 to 11.0)
IEC Inverse Time Curves1
Curve C (5 to 8)Time Dial TD (0.05 to 1.10)
MSAC MSA Output (0 to 359)
Polarization TypeC (1 to 5)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 27G, 32 DisableFunction 47 #1, #2 DisableFunctions 50, 51V, 59 DisableFunctions 67IT, 67NDT Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Enable directional feature and connect inputs as listed in table below for the polarization typeselected for testing:
NOITAZIRALOPEPYT PUTES
1 Cdna,B,Asesahptnerrucdna,lellarapnidecalpCdna,B,AsesahPegatloV.seiresnidecalp
2 seiresnidecalpCdna,B,Asesahptnerruc;egtalovlartueN .
3 tnerrucAesahpylppadnaecneuqesevitagenllufhtiwsegatlovesahp-3decnalaB.ylno
4 epytnoitaziralopsihT.seiresnidecalpCdna,B,Asesahptnerruc;tnerruclartueN.oreztatessihcihw,erutaef)ASM(elgnAytivitisneSmumixaMesutonseod
5 pirtehtnitnerruclartuenro,lellarapniCdna,B,AsesahpegatlovrehtiEI3otecnereferninoigerZERO
.)4ro1epytees(noitidnocpirteviglliw
4. Refer to Appendix D, Inverse Time Curves, and IEC table below to calculate test times for levelsrepresented on the graphs. It is suggested that 4 or 5 test levels be chosen.
1Either a Standard Curve or an IEC Curve must be selected.
C These settings are in a separate menu labeled Neutral Dir Setup.
Testing – 6
6–37
5. Time Delay Test: Apply Nominal Voltage to voltage inputs, if any, as listed in table above. Withoutput contacts connected to a timer, apply input current used in calculations from step 4 to currentphases specified in table above, and start timing. The operating time will be ±3 cycles or ±5% of thecalculated time. Repeat this step for each test level chosen. The points tested verify the operation ofthis function.
Curve 5
!"# $
Curve 6
%
!# $
Curve 7
&
!"# $
Curve 8
"
!# $
IEC Class AStandard Inverse
IEC Class BVery Inverse
IEC Class CExtremely Inverse
IEC Class DLong Time Inverse
t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup
6. Directional Test: Enable directional feature. Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all threephases. Set the current angle to an angle more than 100° from MSA. Apply current 10% more thanPI3, (for type 3, use P) to all three phases. Hold the Target Reset button in and slowly swing theangle of the currents applied towards the MSA until the RES DIR INV TIME O/C 67NIT LED lights,or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The angle should be equal to A –90°or +90°, depending to which side of MSA the current has been set. Release the TARGET RESETbutton and swing the current angle away from the MSA, and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
NOTE: MSA is not used in type 4.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be completed,check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–38
78 Out of Step
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Diameter P Ohms (0.1 to 100)
Offset O Ohms (–100 to +100)
Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Blinder Impedance B Ohms (0.1 to 50.0)
Trip on MHO Exit See Below
Programmed Output Z
Delta-Y Transform DisableFunctions 21, 27, 27TN DisableFunctions 32, 51V DisableFunctions 81 Disable
NOTE: Use Figure 2-29 for reference. A stopwatch is required for this test.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/TestSetup for configurations. Adjust voltage and currents while monitoring the positive sequenceimpedance to a point similar to point Z0 in Figure 2-29.
4. Pickup Test: Disable the TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting and set the delay, D, to a minimal setting.Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and sweep the current angle towards point Z1. When theimpedance passes through point Z1, verify that the OUT OF STEP 78 LED comes on or the functionstatus indicator shows the function picked up on the Monitor Function Status screen. Pausetesting until the delay timer has time to expire. Continue to sweep the current angle to point Z2, andverify output Z operates as point Z2 is crossed, and resets after the seal-in time delay.
Blocking on Stable Swing Test: Reset impedance to a point outside of the mho circle. Adjustvoltages and currents to point Z0. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and sweep past pointZ1. Verify the OUT OF STEP 78 LED comes on or the function status indicator shows the functionpicked up on the Monitor Function Status screen. Pause testing until the delay timer has time toexpire. Reverse sweep direction and sweep the current angle to point Z1, and verify output Z does notoperate and the OUT OF STEP 78 LED goes out or the function status indicator shows the functionreset on the Monitor Function Status screen as point Z1 is crossed.
5. Pickup Test (Trip on mho Exit): Enable the TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting. Adjust voltages andcurrents to point Z0. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button, and sweep the current angletowards point Z1. When the impedance passes through point Z1, verify that the OUT OF STEP 78LED comes on or the function status indicator shows that the function has picked up on the MonitorFunction Status screen. Pause testing until the delay timer has time to expire. Continue to sweepthe current angle to point Z2, and verify that output Z does not operate as point Z2 is crossed. Sweepthe impedance further towards point Z3, and verify output Z operates as point Z3 is crossed, andresets after the seal-in time delay.
Testing – 6
6–39
79 Reconnect
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Time Delay D Cycles (2 to 65,500)
Reconnect Initiate R (1 to 8)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
1. Confirm settings to be tested.
2. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 as designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, Input Configurationsfor configuration.
3. Adjust the three-phase source to Nominal Voltage.
4. Setup: Remove the A phase voltage input to cause Function 27 to trip Output R (Output R will tripafter Function 27 times out).
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, reapply the A phase voltage input and starttiming. The operation time will be D cycles within 2 cycles.
6. Press TARGET/OUTPUT RESET pushbutton to remove targets.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–40
81 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, or #4)
VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Hz (50.00 to 67.00)50 Hz Relay (40.00 to 57.00)
Time Delay D Cycles (2 to 65,500)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 59, 81 (#1, #2, #3, #4) Disable
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, Input Configurationsfor configuration.
4. Pickup Test: Set the voltages to the Nominal Frequency. Hold the TARGET RESET button in andslowly decrease the frequency on the input voltage(s) until the FREQUENCY 81 LED illuminates orthe pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The level of operation will be equal to PHz 0.02 Hz from 57 to 63 (47 to 53), otherwise the accuracy is 0.1 Hz. Return to nominal inputfrequency and the OUTPUT LED’s will extinguish. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts being connected to the timer, apply P 0.5 Hz and start timing.The operating time will be D cycles within –2 to +3 cycles or 1%.
6. Complete the testing for the remaining 81 functions by repeating steps 4 and 5, above.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
Testing – 6
6–41
81R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2)
VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Hz/s (0.10 to 20.00)
Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Negative SequenceVoltage Inhibit N % (0 to 99)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Function 59 DisableFunctions 79, 81 See Below
NOTE: Testing of the 81R function requires a 3-phase voltage source capable of smoothly sweep-ing the frequency of all voltages at a variable rate, continuously.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Configure Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.4, Input Configurationsfor configuration.
4. It is recommended that the 81 function be used to establish a window of operation for the 81Rfunction which is smaller than the actual sweep range of the frequncy applied. This is accomplishedby enabling 81#1 to pickup at a frequency 1 Hz higher than the minimum frequency of the ramp, andassign a unique output. Set 81#2 to pickup 1 Hz lower than the maximum frequency of the ramp, andassign a unique output (see figure below). The frequencies given are suggested for testing ratesbelow 10 Hz/S. Higher rates will require consideration of the capabilities of the test equipmentinvolved. Conncet both of these outputs to an input with jumpers, and set the 81R function to blockon this input. Set the time delays and seal-in times of the 81 functions to minimum. This will result inan operational window that is free of erroneous Hz/S measurements when the voltage source beginsor ends the sweep.
F81#1 Block 81R Active Region F81#2 Block
56.5 Hz 57.5 Hz 60 Hz 62.5 Hz 63.5 Hz
Using this setup, it is important to remember that the 81 elements being used will be operating in the81R blocking regions, and the 81R contact operation must be distinguished from the 81 contacts.
5. Pickup Test: Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases. Calculate the time for the pickup settingand apply a sweep rate 25% less than the pickup (P) to all three phases.
Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the sweep time until the RATE OF CHGFREQ 81R LED lights, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The levelshould be equal to P 0.05 Hz/S or 5 %. Release the TARGET RESET button, and increase thesweep time, and the OUTPUT LED will go out.
6. Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit Test: Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all threephases at a sweep rate 25% above P. Verify that the RATE OF CHG FREQ 81R LED lights, or thepickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. Swing the phase angle of a phase voltageand monitor the positive and negative sequence voltage levels. The 81R OUTPUT should reset whenthe negative sequence voltage is N% 0.5% of the positive sequence voltage.
M-3520 Instruction Book
6–42
7. Timer Test: Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases at a sweep rate 25% belowP. With output contacts connected to a timer, apply a sweep rate 25% above P and start timing. Thecontacts will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles, or 3 %.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired, checkthe proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.
A–1
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
A Appendix A – Configuration Record Forms
This Appendix contains photocopy-ready formsfor recording the configuration and setting of theM-3520 Intertie Protection Relay. The forms canbe supplied to field service personnel for relayconfiguration, and kept on file for future refer-ence. Examples of the suggested use of theseforms are illustrated in Chapter 2, Applicationand Chapter 3, Operation.
A copy of the Relay Configuration Table (pageA-2), discussed in Section 2.2, Configuration,Functions is provided to define and record theblocking inputs and output configuration for therelay. For each function; check if DISABLED orcheck the output contacts to be operated by thefunction, and check the inputs designated to blockthe function operation.
The Communication Data & Unit Setup RecordForm reproduces the Communication and Setupunit menus. This form records definition of theparameters necessary for communication with therelay, as well as access codes, user logo (iden-tifying) lines, date & time setting, and front pan-el display operation.
The Functional Configuration Record Form re-produces the Configure Relay menus (includingthe Setup Relay submenu) accessible via M-3822IPScom® Communication Software or the optionalM-3931 HMI front panel module. For each func-tion or setpoint, refer to the configuration youhave defined using the Relay Configuration Ta-ble, and circle whether it should be enabled ordisabled, the output contacts it will activate, andthe inputs that will block its operation.
The Setpoint & Timing Record Form allows re-cording of the specific values entered for eachenabled setpoint or function. The form followsthe main menu selections of the relay.
The “AS SHIPPED” data forms illustrate the fac-tory settings of the relay.
EXAMPLES:
59 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable enable
59 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
59 #1 PICKUP________ VOLTS
59 #1 DELAY_____CYCLES
A–2
M-3520 Instruction Book
Check each box applicable : (See page A-1 for information on using this table.)D Column = Function Disabled. FL Column = Function blocked by fuse loss.INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s) OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s)
Table A-1 Relay Configuration Table
NOITCNUFD STUPTUO STUPNI
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LF 6 5 4 3 2 1
1#12
2#12
52
1#72
2#72
G72
1#23
2#23
TD64
TI64
1#74
2#74
05
G05
G15
V15
1#95
2#95
I95
G95
LF06
TD76
TI76
TDN76
TIN76
87
97
1#18
2#18
3#18
4#18
1#R18
2#R18
A–3
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
KEY TO INPUT DATA RECORD FORMS
A. All non-bold screens shown on forms require data inputs. Whatever is in that screenwhen ENTER button is pushed (see Figure A-1) will be installed in the M -3520 relay.
B. All bold ruled screens are either menu screens which have horizontal choices (madewith right - left arrows) or screens displaying a result of a choice previously made. Lightly shad-ed screens indicate separate functions.
C. Dotted boxes enclose screens which bound areas that the ENTER button willmove within. In order to move out of one of the dotted boxes it is necessary to either push EXITor make a menu choice change using the Right/Left arrow.
D. The Up/Down arrows only adjust value or letter (lower/upper case) inputs – they do not movearound within the menus.
E. The Right/Left arrows are used only to make horizontally displayed choices. These can be eithermenu choices or input value digit choices. The previous choice or location in a menu is highlight-ed immediately.
F. The ENTER button records the setting change and moves down within a menu. The operator willnotice that after the last menu item, ENTER moves to the top of the same menu but does notchange menu positions.
G. Pushing EXIT at any time will exit the display screen to the last screen containing a horizontalchoice. (Return to the preceding menu).
5
Figure A-1 Human-Machine Interface Module
H. The symbol “ ”or “ ” in a screen indicates additional horizontal menu choices are available inthe indicated direction. As previously described, the Right/Left arrows will move the operator tothose additional choices.
NOTE: If a function is disabled, the input screens for that function will not be displayed.
A–4
M-3520 Instruction Book
USER LOGO LINE 1LOGO1 logo2 out alrm
USER LOGO LINE 1________
USER LOGO LINE 2logo1 LOGO2 out alrm
USER LOGO LINE 2________
CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERSlogo1 logo2 OUT alrm
CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERSPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
CLEAR ALARM COUNTERlogo1 logo2 out ALRM
CLEAR ALARM COUNTERPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
SETUP UNIT comm SETUP exit
SOFTWARE VERSIONVERS sn access number
SOFTWARE VERSIOND-0060V01.XX.XX 7703
SERIAL NUMBERvers SN access number
SERIAL NUMBER________
ALTER ACCESS CODESvers sn ACCESS number
ENTER ACCESS CODELEVEL#1 level#2 level#3
LEVEL #1________
ENTER ACCESS CODElevel#1 LEVEL#2 level#3
LEVEL #2________
ENTER ACCESS CODElevel#1 level#2 LEVEL#3
LEVEL #3________
USER CONTROL NUMBERvers sn access NUMBER
USER CONTROL NUMBER________
COMMUNICATION COMM setup exit
COM1 SETUPCOM1 com2 com3 com_adr
COM1 BAUD RATE baud_4800 baud_9600
COM2 SETUPcom1 COM2 com3 com-adr
COM2 BAUD RATE baud_4800 baud_9600
COM2 DEAD SYNC TIME________ MS
COM2 PROTOCOLbeco2200 MODBUS
COM2 PARITYnone odd even
COM3 SETUPcom1 com2 COM3 com-adr
COM3 DEAD SYNC TIME________ MS
COM3 PROTOCOLbeco2200 MODBUS
COM3 PARITYnone odd even
COMMUNICATION ADDRESScom1 com2 com3 COM-ADR
COMMUNICATION ADDRESS________
COMM ACCESS CODE ACCSS
COMM ACCESS CODE________
Figure A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form (1 of 2)
A–5
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
DATE & TIME TIME error diag
DATE & TIME01-JAN-2001 01:01:80
DATE & TIME________ YEAR
DATE & TIMEJAN feb mar apr may
DATE & TIME________ DATE
DATE & TIMESUN mon tue wed thu
DATE & TIME________ Hour
DATE & TIME________ Minutes
DATE & TIME________ Seconds
CLEAR ERROR CODES time ERROR diag
CLEAR ERROR CODESPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
DIAGNOSTIC MODE time error DIAG
PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE
NOTE: See Section 6.2, Diag-nostic Test Procedures
Figure A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form (2 of 2)
A–6
M-3520 Instruction Book
CONFIGURE RELAYVOLTAGE_RELAY
27 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable enable
27 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
27#2 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEdisable enable
27 #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27 #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
59 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable enable
59 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
59 #2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable enable
59 #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59 #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
27G NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTdisable enable
27G BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27G RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
59G NEUTRAL OVERVOLTdisable enable
59G BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59G RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
47 #1 NEG SEQ OVERVOLTdisable enable
47 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
47 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
47 #2 NEG SEQ OVERVOLTdisable enable
47 #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
47 #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
59I PEAK OVERVOLTAGEdisable enable
59I BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59I RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAY CURRENT_RELAY
50 INST OVERCURRENTdisable ENABLE
50 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
50 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
51V OVERCURRENT INVdisable ENABLE
51V BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
51V RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
50G NTRL INST OVERCURRNTdisable ENABLE
50G BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
50G RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
51G NTRL OVERCURRENT INVdisable ENABLE
51G BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
51G RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (1 of 3)
A–7
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
CONFIGURE RELAY CURRENT_RELAY
46DT NEG SEQ CURRENT DEFdisable enable
46DT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
46DT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
46IT NEG SEQ CURRENT INVdisable enable
46IT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
46IT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
67DT DIR OVERCURRENTdisable enable
67DT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
67DT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
67IT DIR OVERCURRENTdisable enable
67IT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
67IT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
67NDT RESDL DIR OVERCURRdisable enable
67NDT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
67NDT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81 #4 FREQUENCYdisable enable
81 #4 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81 #4 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81R #1 RATE OF CHNG FREQdisable enable
81R #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81R #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81R #2 RATE OF CHNG FREQdisable enable
81R #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81R #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (2 of 3)
67NIT RESDL DIR OVERCURRdisable enable
67NIT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
67NIT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAY FREQUENCY_RELAY
81 #1 FREQUENCYdisable enable
81 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81 #2 FREQUENCYdisable enable
81 #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81 #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81 #3 FREQUENCYdisable enable
81 #3 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81 #3 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
A–8
M-3520 Instruction Book
CONFIGURE RELAYV.T. FUSE_LOSS RELAY
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSdisable enable
60FL BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
60FL RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAY SYNC_CHECK_RELAY
25 SYNC CHECKdisable enable
25 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
25 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAY POWER_RELAY
32 #1 DIRECTIONAL POWERdisable enable
32 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
32 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
32 #2 DIRECTIONAL POWERdisable enable
32 #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
32 #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAYPHASE_DISTANCE_RELAY
21 #1 PHASE DISTANCEdisable enable
21 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
21 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
21 #2 PHASE DISTANCEdisable enable
21 #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
21 #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
78 OUT OF STEPdisable enable
78 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
78 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (3 of 3)
CONFIGURE RELAY RECONNECT_RELAY
79 RECONNECTdisable enable
79 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
79 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
A–9
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
VOLTAGE RELAYVOLT curr freq pwr
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEPHASE_UNDER phase_over
27 #1 PICKUP________ Volts
27 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
27 #2 PICKUP________ Volts
27 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEphase_under PHASE_OVER
59 #1 PICKUP________ Volts
59 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
59 #2 PICKUP________ Volts
59 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
27G NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGENUTRL_UNDER nutrl_over
27G PICKUP________ Volts
27G DELAY________ Cycles
59G NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGEnutrl_under NUTRL_OVER
59G PICKUP________ Volts
59G DELAY________ Cycles
47 NEG SEQ OVERVOLTAGE NEG_SEQ peak_over
47 #1 PICKUP________ Volts
47 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
47 #2 PICKUP________ Volts
47 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
59I PEAK OVERVOLTAGE neg_seq PEAK_OVER
59I PICKUP________ PU
59I DELAY________ Cycles
Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (1 of 4)
A–10
M-3520 Instruction Book
CURRENT RELAYvolt CURR freq pwr
50 INST OVERCURRENTINST inv
50 PICKUP________ Amps
51V INV TIME OVERCURRENTinst INV
51V PICKUP________ Amps
51V CURVEdef inv vinv einv
51V CURVE iec1 iec2 iec3 iec4
51V TIME DIAL________
51V VOLTAGE CONTROLdisable V_CNTRL v_rstrnt
51V VOLTAGE CONTROL________ VOLTS
50G INST OVERCURRENTNUTRL_INST nutrl_inv
50G PICKUP________ Amps
50G DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable enable
51G INV TIME OVERCURRENTnutrl_inst NUTRL_INV
51G PICKUP________ Amps
51G CURVEdef inv vinv einv
51G CURVE iec1 iec2 iec3 iec4
51G TIME DIAL________
51G DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable enable
46 NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT NEG_SEQ dir n_dir
46DT PICKUP________ Amps
46DT DELAY________ Cycles
46IT PICKUP________ Amps
46IT CURVEdef inv vinv einv
46IT CURVE iec1 iec2 iec3 iec4
46IT TIME DIAL________
Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (2 of 4)
67 DIR OVERCURRENT neg_seq DIR n_dir
67DT PICKUP________ Amps
67DT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable enable
67DT THREE PHASE DETECTdisable enable
67DT DELAY________ CYCLES
67IT PICKUP________ Amps
67IT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable enable
67IT CURVEdef inv vinv einv
67IT CURVE iec1 iec2 iec3 iec4
67IT TIME DIAL________
67 MAX SENSITIVITY ANGLE________ Degrees
A–11
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
FREQUENCY RELAYvolt curr FREQ pwr
81 FREQUENCYFREQ rcfreq
81 #1 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
81 #2 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
81 #3 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #3 DELAY________ Cycles
81 #4 PICKUP________ Hz
81 #4 DELAY________ Cycles
81 RATE OF CHNG FREQfreq RCFREQ
81R #1 PICKUP________ Hz/s
81R #1 DELAY________ Cycles
81R #2 PICKUP________ Hz/s
81R #2 DELAY________ Cycles
81R NEG SEQ VOLT IN-HIBIT________ %
POWER RELAYvolt curr freq PWR
32 DIRECTIONAL POWERPWR
32 #1 PICKUP________ PU
32 #1 OVER/UNDER POWEROver_Power Under_Power
32 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
32 #2 PICKUP________ PU
32 #2 OVER/UNDER POWEROver_Power Under_Power
32 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
PHASE DISTANCE RELAY DIST fuse sync
21 PHASE DISTANCEDIST
21 #1 DIAMETER________ Ohms
21 #1 OFFSET________ Ohms
21 #1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees
21 #1 DELAY________ Cycles
21 #2 DIAMETER________ Ohms
21 #2 OFFSET________ Ohms
21 #2 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees
21 #2 DELAY________ Cycles
Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (3 of 4)
67N DIR NEUTRAL OVERCURR neg_seq dir N_DIR
67NDT PICKUP________ Amps
67NDT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable enable
67NDT DELAY________ CYCLES
67NIT PICKUP________ Amps
67NIT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTdisable enable
67NIT CURVEdef inv vinv einv
67NIT CURVE iec1 iec2 iec3 iec4
67NIT TIME DIAL________
NEUTRAL DIR SETUP N_DIRSU
67N MAX SENSITIVITY ANGLE________ Degrees
67N POLARIZATIONtype1 type2 type 3
67N POLARIZATION type4 type5
A–12
M-3520 Instruction Book
V.T. FUSE LOSS RELAY dist FUSE sync
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSFUSE
60FL INPUT INITIATEfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
60FL DELAY30 Cycles
SYNC CHECK RELAY dist fuse SYNC
25 SYNC CHECKSYNC
79 SUPERVISE 25disable enable
25 PHASE LIMIT________ Degrees
25 UPPER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 LOWER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 SYNC CHECK DELAY________ Cycles
25 DELTA VOLTdisable enable
25 DELTA VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
25 DELTA FREQUENCYdisable enable
25 DELTA FREQUENCY LIMIT________ Hz
25 DEAD VOLT LIMIT________ Volts
Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (4 of 4)
25 DEAD V1disable enable
25 DEAD V2disable enable
25 DEAD V1 & V2disable enable
25 DEAD INPUT ENABLEi6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
25 DEAD DELAY________ Cycles
RECONNECT RELAY RECONNECT
79 RECONNECTRECN
79 RECN INITIATED (TRIP)o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
79 DELAY________ Cycles
A–13
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
USER LOGO LINE 1LOGO1 logo2 out alrm
USER LOGO LINE 1BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
USER LOGO LINE 2logo1 LOGO2 out alrm
USER LOGO LINE 2M-3520
CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERSlogo1 logo2 OUT alrm
CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERSPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
CLEAR ALARM COUNTERlogo1 logo2 out ALRM
CLEAR ALARM COUNTERPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
SETUP UNIT comm SETUP exit
SOFTWARE VERSIONVERS sn access number
SOFTWARE VERSIOND-0060V01.02.07 a3b7
SERIAL NUMBERvers SN access number
SERIAL NUMBER1
ALTER ACCESS CODESvers sn ACCESS number
ENTER ACCESS CODELEVEL#1 level#2 level#3
LEVEL #11111
ENTER ACCESS CODElevel#1 LEVEL#2 level#3
LEVEL #22222
ENTER ACCESS CODElevel#1 level#2 LEVEL#3
LEVEL #39999
USER CONTROL NUMBERvers sn access NUMBER
USER CONTROL NUMBER1
COMMUNICATION COMM setup exit
COM1 SETUPCOM1 com2 com3 com_adr
COM1 BAUD RATE baud_4800 BAUD_9800
COM2 SETUPcom1 COM2 com3 com-adr
COM2 BAUD RATE baud_4800 BAUD_9800
COM2 DEAD SYNC TIME50 ms
COM2 PROTOCOLBECO2200 modbus
COM3 SETUPcom1 com2 COM3 com-adr
COM3 DEAD SYNC TIME50 ms
COM3 PROTOCOLBECO2200 modbus
COMMUNICATION ADDRESScom1 com2 com3 COM-ADR
COMMUNICATION ADDRESS1
COMM ACCESS CODE ACCSS
COMM ACCESS CODE9999
Figure A-5 Communication Data & Unit Setup – As Shipped (1 of 2)
A–14
M-3520 Instruction Book
DATE & TIME TIME error diag
DATE & TIME01-JAN-2001 01:01:80
DATE & TIME01 Year
DATE & TIMEJAN feb mar apr may
DATE & TIME01 Date
DATE & TIMESUN mon tue wed thu
DATE & TIME01 Hour
DATE & TIME01 Minutes
DATE & TIME01 Seconds
CLEAR ERROR CODES time ERROR diag
CLEAR ERROR CODESPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
DIAGNOSTIC MODE time error DIAG
PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE
NOTE: See Section 6.2, Diag-nostic Test Procedures
Figure A-5 Communication Data & Unit Setup – As Shipped (2 of 2)
A–15
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
CONFIGURE RELAYVOLTAGE_RELAY
27#1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE
27 #1 BLOCK INPUTFL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1
27 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 O1
27#2 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEDISABLE enable
59 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE
59 #1 BLOCK INPUTFL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1
59 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 O1
59 #2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEDISABLE enable
27G NEUTRAL UNDERVOLT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
59G NEUTRAL OVERVOLT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
47 NEG SEQ OVERVOLT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
59I PEAK OVERVOLTAGE-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
CONFIGURE RELAY CURRENT_RELAY
50 INST OVERCURRENT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
51V OVERCURRENT INV-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
50G NTRL INST OVERCURRNT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
51G NTRL OVERCURRENT INV-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
46 NEG SEQ CURRENT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
67 PHASE DIR OVERCURRENT-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
67N RESIDUAL DIR OVERCUR-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
Figure A-6 Functional Configuration – As Shipped (1 of 2)
CONFIGURE RELAY FREQUENCY_RELAY
81 #1 FREQUENCYDISABLE enable
81 #2 FREQUENCYDISABLE enable
81 #3 FREQUENCYDISABLE enable
81 #4 FREQUENCYDISABLE enable
81R RATE OF CHNG FREQ-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
CONFIGURE RELAY POWER_RELAY
32 DIRECTIONAL POWER-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
CONFIGURE RELAYPHASE_DISTANCE_RELAY
21 #1 PHASE DISTANCE-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
A–16
M-3520 Instruction Book
CONFIGURE RELAYV.T. FUSE_LOSS RELAY
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSdisable ENABLE
60FL BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1
60FL RELAY OUTPUTo8 O7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAY SYNC_CHECK_RELAY
25 SYNC CHECK-FUNCTION UNAVAILABLE-
Figure A-6 Functional Configuration Record Form – As Shipped (2 of 2)
CONFIGURE RELAY RECONNECT_RELAY
79 RECONNECTdisable ENABLE
79 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
79 RELAY OUTPUTO8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
A–17
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
VOLTAGE RELAYVOLT curr freq pwr
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEPHASE_UNDER phase_over
27 #1 PICKUP108 Volts
27 #1 DELAY30 Cycles
59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEphase_under PHASE_OVER
59 #1 PICKUP132 Volts
59 #1 DELAY30 Cycles
27G NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGENUTRL_UNDER nutrl_over
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
59G NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGEnutrl_under NUTRL_OVER
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
47 NEG SEQ OVERVOLTAGE NEG_SEQ peak_over
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
59I PEAK OVERVOLTAGE neg_seq PEAK_OVER
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
Figure A-7 Setpoint & Timing – As Shipped (1 of 2)
CURRENT RELAYvolt CURR freq pwr
50 INST OVERCURRENTINST inv
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
51V INV TIME OVERCURRENTinst INV
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
50G INST OVERCURRENTNUTRL_INST nutrl_inv
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
51G INV TIME OVERCURRENTnutrl_inst NUTRL_INV
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
46 NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT NEG_SEQ dir n_dir
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
67 DIR OVERCURRENT neg_seq DIR n_dir
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
67N DIR NEUTRAL OVERCURR neg_seq dir N_DIR
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
NEUTRAL DIR SETUP N_DIRSU
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
A–18
M-3520 Instruction Book
POWER RELAYvolt curr freq PWR
32 DIRECTIONAL POWERPWR
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
PHASE DISTANCE RELAY DIST fuse sync
21 PHASE DISTANCEDIST ostp
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
78 OUT OF STEPdist OSTP
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
FREQUENCY RELAYvolt curr FREQ pwr
81 FREQUENCYFREQ rcfreq
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
81 RATE OF CHNG FREQfreq RCFREQ
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
Figure A-7 Setpoint & Timing – As Shipped (2 of 2)
V.T. FUSE LOSS RELAY dist FUSE sync
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSFUSE
60FL INPUT INITIATEFL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
60FL DELAY30 Cycles
SYNC CHECK RELAY dist fuse SYNC
25 SYNC CHECKSYNC
FUNCTION(S) DISABLEDSEE CONFIGURE MENU
RECONNECT RELAY RECONNECT
79 RECONNECTRECN
79 RECN INITIATED (TRIP)o8 o7 o6 o5 O4 O3 O2 O1
79 DELAY30 Cycles
A–19
Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
Check each box applicable : (See page A-1 for information on using this table.)
D Column = Function Disabled. FL Column = Function blocked by fuse loss.
INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s) OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s)
Table A-2 M-3520 Configuration As Shipped
NOITCNUFD STUPTUO STUPNI
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LF 6 5 4 3 2 1
1#12
2#12
52
1#72
2#72
G72
1#23
2#23
TD64
TI64
1#74
2#74
05
G05
G15
V15
1#95
2#95
I95
G95
LF06
TD76
TI76
TDN76
TIN76
87
97
1#18
2#18
3#18
4#18
1#R18
2#R18
Communications: Appendix – B
B–1
The M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay incorporatesthree serial ports for intelligent, digitalcommunication with external devices. Equipmentsuch as RTUs, data concentrators, modem, orcomputers can be interfaced for direct, on-line realtime data acquisition and control.
Generally, all data available to the operator throughthe front panel of the relay, with the optional M-3931HMI module is accessible remotely through theBECO 2200 data exchange protocol. This protocoldocument and the BECO 2200 M-3520 database-specified protocol document are available from thefactory or our website at www.beckwithelectric.com.
The M-3822 IPScom® Communication Softwarepackage has been supplied for communication toany IBM compatible computer running underMicrosoft® Windows 95 or higher.
The protocol implements serial, byte oriented,asynchronous communication, and can be used tofulfill the following communications functions:
• Real time monitoring of line status.
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints.
• Downloading of recorded oscillographdata.
• Reconfiguration of functions.
NOTE: The following restrictions apply forMODBUS protocol use:
1. MODBUS protocol is not supported onCOM1
2. Parity is supported on COM2 and COM3only, valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1;8,E,1; 8,N,1; 8,O,2; 8,E,2 . ASCII modeis not supported (RTU only)
3. Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600are supported
4. Only the following MODBUS commandsare supported:a. Read holding register (function 03)b. read input register (function 04)
B Appendix B – Communications
c. Force single coil (function 05)d. Preset single register (function 06)
6. MODBUS does not support oscillographrecord downloading.
For detailed information on communications, referto Chapter 4, IPScom Computer Operation.
Communication PortsThe M-3520 has both front and rear panel RS-232ports, and a rear RS-485 port. The front and rearpanel RS-232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connectorconfigured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) perthe RS-232C standard. Signals are defined in TableB-1.
The RS-485 port is assigned to the rear panelterminal block pins 1 through 4 (see Figure B-2).This can be configured for isolated RS-485 two-wireor non-isolated four-wire operation.
NOTE: Four-wire operation is only available as anon-isolated RS-485 supplied option.
Each communication port may be configured tooperate at any of the standard baud rates (1200,2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS-485 port sharesthe same baud rate with COM2 (or COM1 – seeSection 5.3).
While the RS-232 communication ports do includesome Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) protectioncircuitry, they are excluded from passing ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1998. Beckwith Electricrecommends the use of RS-232 to fiber opticconverters to avoid any question of surge-withstandcapability.
A null modem cable (see Figure B-1) allows di-rect connection to a personal computer (PC), ifdesired.
M-3520 Instruction Book
B–2
TIUCRIC LANGIS 1MOC 2MOC
BB XR ataDevieceR 2niP 2niP
AB XT ataDtimsnarT 3niP 3niP
AC STR dneSottseuqeR 7niP 7niP
BC STC dneSotraelC 8niP
DC RTD ydaeRlanimreTataD 4niP 4niP
FC DCD tceteDreirraCataD 1niP
BA DNG dnuorGlangiS 5niP 5niP
V51+ *1niP
V51- *9niP
)+(B-GIRI *6niP
srepmuJdnasehctiwSdraoBtiucriC,5.5ees-LANOITPO*± (V51 ± .xamAm001@)%51
Table B-1 Communication Port Signals
Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable
Communications: Appendix – B
B–3
RS-232
TR
T R
TR TR
REPOFF
DCEDTE
DCEDTE
REPOFF
DCEDTE
REPOFF
DCEDTE
REPOFF
RS-232 RS-232
Slave #1Address 1
Slave #2Address 2
Slave #3Address 3
PC Master
25 pin or 9-25 pinStraight-through Cable
DYMEC Fiber OpticLink/Repeater
Fiber Optic Cable
9-25 pin Straight-through Cables
IPScom running in “Echo Cancel” mode
Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network
M-3520 Instruction Book
B–4
RX TX - + - +
RX TX - + - +
PC Master
T-T+
R-R+
Slave #1Address 1
Slave #2Address 5
RS-232 to RS-485 4-wire Converteror RS-485 card
RX TX - + - +
Slave #NAddress 3
Twisted Pair
200 *
PC Master
RX TX - + - +
RX TX - + - +
B-
A+
Slave #1Address 6
Slave #2Address 8
RX TX - + - +
Slave #3Address N
200 *
RS-232 to RS-4852-wire Converter or RS-485 Card
Twisted Pair
CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, the units should bemounted in the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber optics with the appropriateconverters should be used for isolation. The two-wire topology is preferable to the four-wire, as circuitrywithin the relay provides some isolation. Four-wire operation is only available when the four-wire RS-485option is selected at the time of purchase.
NOTE: Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave on the network shouldhave the termination resistor installed.
Figure B-3 RS-485 Networks
RS-485 2-Wire Network
RS-485 4-Wire Network
Self-Test Error Codes: Appendix – C
C–1
C Appendix C – Error Codes
Table C-1A Error Codes
edoCrorrE noitpircseD
1
2 liaftsetMARdekcab-yrettaB
3 liafpu-rewopetirwMORPEE
4 liafpu-rewopkcabdaerMORPEE
5 liaftsetMARtroplauD
6 liafmuskcehcnoitarbilacetirwMORPEE
7 rewopfossolliafnoitarbilactnioptesetirwMORPEE
8 MARdekcabyrettabfossolliafmuskcehctnioptesetirwMORPEE
9 liafkcolblacisyhp/muskcehcAMD
01 liaftseTyromeMhpargollicsO
11 liafMARmargorplanretxePSD
21 liaftrevnocD/APSD
31 liaflennahcdnuorgPSD
41 liaflennahcecnereferPSD
51 liafniagAGPPSD
61 liaf1tpurretnitsoH>-<PSDPSD
71 liaftes2tpurretnitsoH>-<PSDPSD
81 liafteser2tpurretnitsoH>-<PSDPSD
91 liafdaolmargorpPSD
02
12
22 liaftsetnrettapMARPDPSD
32 rorreyfirevetirwMORPEE
42 rorretsetMARBB
52 MORPEEdezilaitininU
M-3520 Instruction Book
C–2
Table C-1B Error Codes
edoCrorrE noitpircseD
62 gninrawhctamsimmuskcehcnoitarbilacGNINRAW
72 gninrawhctamsimmuskcehctnioptesGNINRAW
82 gninraw)MARBB(yrettabwolGNINRAW
92 liaftsetgninnurAGPxiM/ylppuS
03
13 edoctpurretniITNIdezingocernU
23 liafgodhctawetadpuseulaV
33 rorretrobA
43 rorretratseR
53 rorretpurretnI
63 rorreparT
73 liafkcehcgninnurnoitarbilaC
83
93
04 esiontpurretnideepshgih78
14
24
34
44 wolfrevoreffubhpargollicsO
54 wolfrednureffubhpargollicsO
64 srosahpnoitarbilacetaluclacotPSDfoeruliaF
74 )niag(tupnielbatarbilacnU
84 )esahp(tupnielbatarbilacnU
94
05 wolfrevokcatS
Inverse Time Curves: Appendix D
D–1
D Appendix D – Inverse Time Curves
This Appendix contains Inverse Time Curve Families for M-3520 Intertie Protection Relay functions # 46, 51V,51G, 67, and 67N.
D–2
M-3520 Instruction Book
NOTE: The above times are in seconds and are given for a time dial of 1.0. For othertime dial values, multiply the above by the time dial value.
Table D-1A M-3520 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves
gnitteSpaTfoelpitluM emiTetinifeD emiTesrevnI emiTesrevnIyreV emiTesrevnIylemertxE
05.155.1
99896.026846.0
45935.433551.4
87564.330211.3
02538.474782.4
06.156.1
93506.030865.0
30918.356225.3
82218.245655.2
26538.360754.3
07.157.1
85535.052705.0
78952.385520.3
70633.213441.2
37531.349958.2
08.158.1
54284.086064.0
66518.237626.2
02679.197728.1
49026.280214.2
09.159.1
65144.077424.0
99554.211103.2
79596.132875.1
22822.292560.2
00.250.2
60014.012973.0
31061.293130.2
45274.132773.1
60029.149987.1
01.251.2
60683.084673.0
84319.191508.1
39092.194212.1
87276.168665.1
02.203.2
45563.039253.0
75227.149045.1
21821.162610.1
02874.186223.1
04.205.2
51143.081033.0
40193.116562.1
70229.009148.0
05291.112280.1
06.207.2
99913.075013.0
54951.117860.1
10377.043317.0
08789.062609.0
08.209.2
98103.029392.0
94099.085229.0
72166.045516.0
72538.030377.0
00.301.3
66682.070082.0
52368.031118.0
51575.003935.0
11817.093966.0
02.303.3
51472.098862.0
41567.093427.0
33705.007874.0
39526.000785.0
04.305.3
72462.003062.0
81886.019556.0
79254.077924.0
69155.023025.0
06.307.3
79652.092452.0
01726.053106.0
97804.077983.0
36194.045564.0
08.300.4
92252.057942.0
23875.040935.0
84273.020143.0
57144.092104.0
02.404.4
27542.079142.0
14605.064774.0
82513.023392.0
46563.006433.0
06.408.4
25832.014532.0
67154.049824.0
35472.014852.0
14703.064382.0
Inverse Time Curves: Appendix D
D–3
Table D-1B M-3520 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves
NOTE: The above times are in seconds and are given for a time dial of 1.0. For othertime dial values, multiply the above by the time dial value.
gnitteSpaTfoelpitluM emiTetinifeD emiTesrevnI emiTesrevnIyreV emiTesrevnIylemertxE
00.502.5
66232.092032.0
17804.087093.0
65442.096232.0
72262.034342.0
04.506.5
43822.048622.0
59473.020163.0
45222.049312.0
06622.015112.0
08.500.6
38522.043522.0
48843.082833.0
37602.018002.0
39791.076581.0
02.604.6
62522.029422.0
17723.093913.0
11591.044091.0
13571.068561.0
06.608.6
06322.003222.0
05113.020403.0
20681.078181.0
13751.075941.0
00.702.7
20122.077912.0
59692.072092.0
79771.013471.0
35241.011631.0
04.706.7
55812.063712.0
89382.070872.0
09071.037761.0
72031.029421.0
08.700.8
12612.001512.0
35272.043762.0
97461.090261.0
30021.055511.0
02.804.8
30412.000312.0
15262.030852.0
16951.063751.0
44111.086701.0
06.808.8
30212.011112.0
88352.070052.0
43551.045351.0
22401.050101.0
00.905.9
52012.031802.0
06642.053932.0
79151.007741.0
41890.007090.0
00.0105.01
04702.076602.0
22432.032922.0
37441.008141.0
47480.034970.0
00.1105.11
49502.012502.0
24422.097912.0
49831.051631.0
96470.064070.0
00.2105.21
94402.087302.0
63512.051112.0
54331.048031.0
76660.092360.0
00.3105.31
01302.034202.0
61702.014302.0
33821.039521.0
62060.055750.0
00.4105.41
97102.091102.0
19991.066691.0
46321.064121.0
31550.079250.0
00.5105.51
26002.090002.0
76391.059091.0
14911.074711.0
40150.043940.0
00.6105.61
16991.081991.0
15881.053681.0
66511.089311.0
48740.025640.0
00.7105.71
18891.015891.0
94481.049281.0
34211.020111.0
93540.024440.0
00.8105.81
72891.011891.0
17181.028081.0
47901.016801.0
26340.089240.0
00.9105.91
30891.030891.0
92081.041081.0
26701.097601.0
05240.091240.0
00.02 30891.0 41081.0 11601.0 50240.0
D–8
M-3520 Instruction Book
Figure D-5 IEC Curve #1 Inverse
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20Multiple of Pickup
Tim
e in
Sec
on
ds
1.11
0.9
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
.05
!"# $
Inverse Time Curves: Appendix D
D–9Figure D-6 IEC Curve #2 Very Inverse
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20Multiple of Pickup
Tim
e in
Sec
on
ds
1.11
0.9
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
.05
K
%
!# $
D–10
M-3520 Instruction Book
Figure D-7 IEC Curve #3 Extremely Inverse
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20Multiple of Pickup
Tim
e in
Sec
on
ds
1.11
0.90.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
.05
K
&
!"# $
Inverse Time Curves: Appendix D
D–11Figure D-8 IEC Curve #4 Long-Time Inverse
0.1
1
10
100
1000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20Multiple of Pickup
Sec
onds
1.11
0.90.80.6
0.4
0.2
K
.05
"
!# $
Appendix E – Layup and Storage
E–1
Appendix E includes the recommended storageparameters, periodic surveillance activities and layupconfiguration for the M-3520 Intertie ProtectionRelay.
Storage Requirements (Environment)The recommended storage environment parametersfor the M-3520 are:
• The ambient temperature where theM-3520 is stored is within a range of 5° Cto 40° C
• The maximum relative humidity is lessthan or equal to 80% for temperatures upto 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to50% for relative humidity at 40° C.
• The storage area environment is free ofdust, corrosive gases, flammablematerials, dew, percolating water, rain andsolar radiation.
Storage Requirements (Periodic SurveillanceDuring Storage)The M-3520 power supply contains electrolyticcapacitors. It is recommended that power be appliedto the relay (PS1 and optional PS2 redundant powersupply when installed) every three to five years fora period of not less than one hour to help preventthe electrolytic capacitors from drying out.
Layup ConfigurationThe M-3520 includes a removable lithium batterybacked TIMEKEEPER® module (Beckwith Electriccomponent U25, Figure 5-7). The TIMEKEEPERmodule is the M-3520 real-time clock and alsoprovides power to the unit’s nonvolatile memorywhen power is not applied to the unit.
E Appendix – Layup and Storage
Layup of the M-3520 requires verifying that thesystem clock is stopped. The steps necessary toverify system clock status are as follows:
CAUTION: Do not use the diagnostic mode inrelays that are installed in an active protectionscheme.
For units with the optional HMI panel:
1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fusesare installed.
2. Determine the unit power supply ratingby observing the check box below thePS terminals on the rear of the unit.
3. Apply power to the unit consistant withthe rating determined in Step 2 (seeSection 5.3 , External Connections). Theunit will enter the selftest mode.
4. When the selftests are complete, thenpress ENTER to begin main menu.
5. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilSETUP UNIT is displayed.
6. Press ENTER to access the SETUPUNIT menu.
7. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilDIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed.
8. Press ENTER. A reset warning will bedisplayed:
PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE
WARNING: All relay functions and protectionwill be inoperative while the relay is in diagnosticmode.
9. Press ENTER. Unit will now reset andDIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarilydisplayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST(RELAY). This is the beginning of thediagnostic menu.
M-3520 Instruction Book
E–2
10. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilthe following is displayed:
CLOCK TEST CLOCK led cal factory
11. Press ENTER. The following isdisplayed:
CLOCK TEST03-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000
12. If the clock is running, press ENTER tostop the clock. The following isdisplayed:
CLOCK TEST-CLOCK STOP-
NOTE: When the relay clock is stopped, theseconds will be displayed as 80.
13. Press ENTER and verify the relay clockis stopped. A display similar to thefollowing is shown with the secondsstopped:
CLOCK TEST03-JAN-09:01:80.000
14. When the clock has been verified to bestopped, then press EXIT until thefollowing message appears:
PRESS EXIT TOEXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE
15. Press EXIT again to exit DIAGNOSTICMODE. The relay will reset and normalrunning mode will resume.
NOTE: Pressing any button other than EXIT willreturn the user to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
16. Remove power from the unit. The unitcan now be placed in storage.
For units without the optional HMI panel:
1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fusesare installed.
2. Determine the unit power supply ratingby observing the check box below thePS terminals on the rear of the unit.
3. Apply power to the unit consistant withthe rating determined in Step 2 (seeSection 5.3 , External Connections). Theunit will enter the selftest mode.
4. Install IPSutilTM CommunicationsSoftware (see Section 4.6, IPSutilCommunications Software) on a PC thatincludes the following:
• Microsoft WindowsTM 95 OperatingSystem or above
• Equipped with a serial port
5. Connect a null modem cable from COM1of the relay to the PC serial port.
IPSutil supports COM1 port directconnection only. IPSutil is not supportedthrough COM2 or COM3 ports.
6. Open the IPSutil software.
7. Select “Comm” from the menu bar andthen select “Connect”. IPSutil will displaythe “Communication Dialog Screen”Figure 4-5.
8. Verify that the PC COM port that thenull modem cable is connected to isselected in the “PC Port”.
9. Select “Open COM”, IPSutil will connectto the unit and then return to the IPSutilMain Screen.
10. Select “Clock” from the menu bar. IPSutilwill display the “Unit Date/Time DialogScreen Figure 4-11.
11. Verify that “Start Clock” is displayed,then proceed as follows:
a. If “Start Clock” is displayed, thenselect “Save” and go to Step 12.
b. If “Stop Clock” is displayed, thenselect “Stop Clock” and then select“Save”.
12. Close communications with the unit byselecting “Comm” from the menu barand then select “Exit”.
13. Disconnect the null modem cable andthen remove power from the unit. Theunit can now be placed in storage.
Storage of the M-3520 greater than five years mayrequire replacement of the lithium battery prior toplacing the unit in service. Contact Beckwith ElectricCustomer Service for replacement procedure.
Legal Information
PatentThe units described in this manual are covered byU.S. Patents 5,592,393 and 5,224,011.
Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify theSeller, its directors, officers, agents, and employ-ees from any and all costs and expense, damage orloss, resulting from any alleged infringementofUnited States Letters Patent or rights accruingthereform or trademarks, whether federal, state, orcommon law, arising from the Seller’s compliancewith Buyer’s designs, specifications, or instruc-tions.
WarrantySeller hereby warrants that the goods which are thesubject matter of this contract will be manufacturedin a good workmanlike manner and all materialsused herein will be new and reasonably suitable forthe equipment. Seller warrants that if, during aperiod of five years from date of shipment of theequipment, the equipment rendered shall be foundby the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform inaccordance with Seller’s specifications of theproduct, Seller shall at his expense correct thesame, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship theequipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’sresponsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace-ment value of the equipment furnished under thiscontract.
Seller makes no warranties expressed or impliedother than those set out above. Seller specificallyexcludes the implied warranties of merchantibilityand fitness for a particular purpose. There are nowarranties which extend beyond the descriptioncontained herein. In no event shall Seller be liablefor consequential, exemplary, or punitive damagesof whatever nature.
Any equipment returned for repair must be sentwith transportation charges prepaid. The equipmentmust remain the property of the Buyer. The afore-mentioned warranties are void if the value of theunit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return.
IndemnificationThe Seller shall not be liable for any propertydamages whatsoever or for any loss or damagearising out of, connected with, or resulting fromthis contract, or from the performance or breachthereof, or from all services covered by or furnishedunder this contract.
In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,including but not limited to, loss of profits orrevenue, loss of use of the equipment or anyassociated equipment, cost of capital, cost ofpurchased power, cost of substitute equipment,facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims ordamages of customers or employees of the Buyerfor such damages, regardless of whether said claimor damages is based on contract, warranty, tortincluding negligence, or otherwise.
Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liablefor any personal injury whatsoever.
It is agreed that when the equipment furnishedhereunder are to be used or performed in connec-tion with any nuclear installation, facility, oractivity, Seller shall have no liability for any nucleardamage, personal injury, property damage, ornuclear contamination to any property located at ornear the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees toindemnify and hold harmless the Seller against anyand all liability associated therewith whatsoeverwhether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclearreactor and includes the site on which any of theforegoing is located, all operations conducted onsuch site, and all premises used for such opera-tions.
NoticeAny illustrations and descriptions by BeckwithElectric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose ofidentification.
The drawings and/or specifications enclosed hereinare the proprietary property of Beckwith ElectricCo., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-tion of the apparatus described therein withoutwritten permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
No illustration or description contained hereinshall be construed as an express warranty ofaffirmation, promise, description, or sample, andany and all such express warranties are specificallyexcluded nor shall such illustration or descriptionimply a warranty that the product is merchantableor fit for a particular purpose. There shall be nowarranties which extend beyond those contained inthe Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.
All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approvalof the Company.
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121E-MAIL [email protected] PAGE www.beckwithelectric.com
© Beckwith Electric Co.Printed in USA
800-3520-IB-09MC1 10/07